BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 1/217

GSM/EDGE BSS, Rel.

RG20(BSS), Operating

Documentation, Issue 08

Install

Installing

BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II /

240 XL IIB

DN0932994

Confidential

Nokia Siemens Networks is continually striving to reduce the adverse environmental effects of

its products and services. We would like to encourage you as our customers and users to join

us in working towards a cleaner, safer environment. Please recycle product packaging and

follow the recommendations for power use and proper disposal of our products and their compo-

nents.

If you should have questions regarding our Environmental Policy or any of the environmental

services we offer, please contact us at Nokia Siemens Networks for any additional information.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


2 DN0932994

InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the

product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the

use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under whichthe document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted

in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The

documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel,

and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes

customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the

documentation.

The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity,

or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability

arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and

finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,

Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions

contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia

Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which

may not be covered by the document.

Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO

EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTA-

TION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDI-

RECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED

TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY

OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION

IN IT.

This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and

other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.

The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark

of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.

Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respectiveowners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.

Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2009. All rights reserved

f Important Notice on Product SafetyThis product may present safety risks due to laser, electricity, heat, and other sources

of danger.

Only trained and qualified personnel may install, operate, maintain or otherwise handle

this product and only after having carefully read the safety information applicable to this

product.

The safety information is provided in the Safety Information section in the “Legal, Safety

and Environmental Information” part of this document or documentation set.

The same text in German:

f Wichtiger Hinweis zur ProduktsicherheitVon diesem Produkt können Gefahren durch Laser, Elektrizität, Hitzeentwicklung oder

andere Gefahrenquellen ausgehen.

Installation, Betrieb, Wartung und sonstige Handhabung des Produktes darf nur durch

geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal unter Beachtung der anwendbaren Sicherheits-

anforderungen erfolgen.

Die Sicherheitsanforderungen finden Sie unter „Sicherheitshinweise“ im Teil „Legal,

Safety and Environmental Information“ dieses Dokuments oder dieses Dokumentations-

satzes.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 3


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

Table of contentsThis document has 217 pages.

Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.1 Purpose of the manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.2 Installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.3 Handling of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2 Base station installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.1 Position in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.2 Site requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.3 Site configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.4 Construction overview of the BS-types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.4.1 Rack configuration of different BS-variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2.4.1.1 Rack configurations BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.4.1.2 Rack configurations of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.4.1.3 Rack configurations of the BS-240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.4.1.4 Rack configurations for BS-240XL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.4.1.5 Rack configurations for BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.4.1.6 Rack configurations for BS-240XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.5 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.5.1 Preliminary checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.5.2 Rack mounted on a pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.5.3 Rack shipped in a crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322.5.4 Unpacking of modules and batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.5.5 Rack installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.5.5.1 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

2.5.5.2 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

2.5.6 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 II (B) / 240XL II (B) . . . . . 45

2.5.7 Back-to-back assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

3 External cabling activit ies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.2 Ground and AC- power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

3.3 Ground and DC- power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

3.4 Abis-interface - PCM link terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

3.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm cable impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

3.4.2 Abis-interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm. . . . . . . . . . . . 72

3.4.3 Abis-interface without ABISCON / OVPT / ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

3.4.4 Monitoring interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

3.4.5 Abis-interface with ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

3.5 Connection of external alarm sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

3.5.1 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

3.5.2 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

3.6 Installation of the mounting kit OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

3.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893.8 External alarm protection for ACTM (EAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


4 DN0932994


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

3.9 Alarm collection terminal ACTC - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . . . . 97

3.10 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 100

3.11 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-4 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 102

3.12 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-5 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 1043.13 Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.14 Antenna connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

3.14.1 Preparation of antenna jumper cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

3.15 Installation of TMA or MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

3.15.1 Installation of the TMADV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

3.15.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

3.15.3 Installation of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

4 Rack completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

4.1 Preparation of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.2 Overview of battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

4.3 Installation of backup batteries in service rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4.3.1 Installation of backup batteries type “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

4.3.2 Installation of backup batteries type “Oerlicon”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

4.3.3 Installation of backup batteries type “EnerSys / Hawker” . . . . . . . . . . . 135

4.4 Inter-rack cable routing (standard configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

4.4.1 Battery cabling of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

4.4.2 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . 142

4.4.3 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . 145

4.4.4 Battery alarm cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

4.4.5 DC cabling between the racks (BS-240 / 240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

4.4.6 DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524.4.7 -48V DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . 153

4.4.8 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . 154

4.4.9 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . 155

4.4.10 CAN-Bus connections BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II . . . . . . . . . . 157

4.4.11 CAN-Bus cabling of 240 IIB, BS-240XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

4.4.12 CC-Link cabling of BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II. . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

4.4.13 CC-link cabling between BS-240 IIB/240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

4.5 Inter-rack cabling (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

4.5.1 Battery cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

4.5.2 Battery cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II racks. . . . . . . . . 168

4.5.3 Battery cabling activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

4.5.4 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension . . . . . . 171

4.5.5 -48V DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension. . . . . 172

4.5.6 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

4.5.7 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

4.5.8 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension. . . . . . 177

4.5.9 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension. . . . . 178

4.5.10 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

4.5.11 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

4.5.12 SELIC-cabling between the racks (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 181

4.6 Combination of racks with different heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1824.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 5


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

4.7 Combination of racks with a gap between the racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

4.7.1 BS-240XLU II, Service1A / Extension with BS-240XLU IIB, Base. . . . 183

4.8 Installation of link equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

4.8.1 Installation of microwave equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894.8.2 Installation of NTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

4.9 Installation of modules and cover parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

4.10 Nonstandard installation works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

4.10.1 Installation of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

4.10.2 Battery-upgrade of BS-240 Service racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

4.11 Setup of system cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

4.11.1 System cabling with semi-rigid cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

4.11.2 System Cabling with flexi-cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

4.11.3 Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

4.12 Post installation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

4.12.1 Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2104.12.2 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

5 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

5.1 Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

5.2 Ancillary material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

5.3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

5.3.1 Technical data BS-240 / BS-240 II / BS-240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

5.3.2 Technical data BS-240XL / BS-240XL II / BS-240 XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . 215

5.4 Checklist for Base Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


6 DN0932994


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

List of figuresFigure 1 ESD Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II . . . . 17

Figure 4 Position of the base station within the SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Figure 5 Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Figure 6 Rack types of the BS-240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Figure 7 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Figure 8 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Figure 9 Types of BS-240 II racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Figure 10 Types of BS-240U IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 11 Types of BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Figure 12 Types of BS-240XL II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Figure 13 Types of BS-240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Figure 14 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Figure 15 Rack mounted on the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 16 Dismounting the rack from the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 17 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 18 Removal of the packing material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Figure 19 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Figure 20 Unpacking of the battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Figure 21 Removal of top cover for crane eye access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Figure 22 Opening of rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Figure 23 Removal of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 24 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 25 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 26 Guideline for crane transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Figure 27 Space necessary for installation of base station rack variants . . . . . . . . 39

Figure 28 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Figure 29 Floor and wall mounting of the racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Figure 30 Earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Figure 31 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Figure 32 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Figure 33 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 34 Mounting of pos. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 35 Mounting of stiffening parts (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Figure 36 Mounting of stiffening parts (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Figure 37 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Figure 38 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Figure 39 Claws for the front feet before mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Figure 40 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Figure 41 Back-to-back configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Figure 42 Side-by-side configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Figure 43 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2 . . . . . . . . . 49

Figure 44 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Figure 45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 7


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

Figure 46 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Figure 47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1 rack. . . . . . . . . . . 57

Figure 48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 rack. . . . . . . . . . . 57

Figure 49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Figure 50 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Figure 51 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Figure 52 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Figure 53 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 rack. . . . . . . . 60

Figure 54 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 rack . . . . . . . 60

Figure 55 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Figure 56 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension rack . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Figure 57 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL IIB Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Figure 58 Locations of the connectors for external cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Figure 59 Ground and AC mains connections (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Figure 60 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 rack) . 65Figure 61 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 62 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Figure 63 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Figure 64 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Figure 65 Abis interface PCM0 pin assignment, 120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Figure 66 Abis interface PCM1 pin assignment, 120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Figure 67 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Figure 68 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT. . . . . . . . . . . 76

Figure 69 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Figure 70 ETHCON module, connected via FE0 and FE1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Figure 71 ETHCON, external clock connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Figure 72 ETHCON trace adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Figure 73 ACTM terminal numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Figure 74 Terminal numbering of the ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Figure 75 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Figure 76 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Figure 77 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Figure 78 Routing of external alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Figure 79 Assembly guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Figure 80 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Figure 81 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Figure 82 Label with terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Figure 83 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Figure 84 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Figure 85 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Figure 86 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100



Figure 89 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Figure 90 Tools for jumper fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Figure 91 Parts of the connector unit kit (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Figure 92 Using the trimming tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


8 DN0932994


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

Figure 93 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Figure 94 Removal of metal particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Figure 95 Assembly of the connector unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Figure 96 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Figure 97 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Figure 98 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Figure 99 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Figure 100 Opening of the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Figure 101 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Figure 102 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 103 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Figure 104 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Figure 105 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 106 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 107 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Figure 108 TMA with mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Figure 109 Example of STMAx and DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 110 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 111 Example of pole mounting with the DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Figure 112 Example of pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Figure 113 Contents of the connection kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Figure 114 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Figure 115 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II) . . . . . . . . 123

Figure 116 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Figure 117 Paint retouch of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Figure 118 Placement of the sealing profile tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Figure 119 Removable pieces of the MK:ROOF-2BV1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Figure 120 Parts for battery fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Figure 121 Placement of the spacer strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Figure 122 Preparation of the battery tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Figure 123 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Figure 124 Connection of backup battery set “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Figure 125 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Figure 126 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Figure 127 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Figure 128 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Figure 129 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3 . . . . . . . . . 135

Figure 130 Placement and connection of the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Figure 131 Detail of the connection of battery 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Figure 132 Parts of the air vent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 133 Routing of the air vent tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 134 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection . . . . . . . . 138

Figure 135 Terminal blocks for battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Figure 136 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Figure 137 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . . . . . . 143

Figure 138 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Figure 139 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 9


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

Figure 140 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . 146

Figure 141 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1). . . . . . . . 147

Figure 142 Battery alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Figure 143 Routing of the DC power supply wires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Figure 144 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Figure 145 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Figure 146 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Figure 147 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3) . 152

Figure 148 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1). 153

Figure 149 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) 154

Figure 150 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 155

Figure 151 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 156

Figure 152 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Figure 153 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Figure 154 CAN-bus connectors on the top of the rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Figure 155 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Figure 156 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Figure 157 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Figure 158 CC-link cables between the racks BS-240 / 240 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Figure 159 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Figure 160 CC-link cables between BS-240XL / 240XL II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Figure 161 CC-link interfaces on the top of Base rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Figure 162 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Figure 163 CC-link cables between BS-240XL IIB racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Figure 164 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Figure 165 Example of battery cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service racks. 166

Figure 166 Example of battery cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . 168

Figure 167 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Figure 168 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Figure 169 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1. . . . . 171

Figure 170 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3) . 172

Figure 171 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1) . 173

Figure 172 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks . . . . . . . . 174

Figure 173 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3) . 175

Figure 174 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) 176

Figure 175 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1 177Figure 176 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1178

Figure 177 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . 179

Figure 178 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . 180

Figure 179 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension) . . . . . . . 182

Figure 180 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module . . 183

Figure 181 (View B) Cable connections to ground and MSU:DC of Extension . . . 183

Figure 182 Combination of BS-240XLU II with BS-240 XLU IIB racks . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 183 Cable connections between BS-240 XLU II and BS-240 XLU IIB racks185

Figure 184 CC-link connections BS-240XLU II Ext. / BS-240XLU IIB Base rack . 186

Figure 185 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Figure 186 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


10 DN0932994


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

Figure 187 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Figure 188 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II) . . 191

Figure 189 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II) . . . 191

Figure 190 Overview of microwave cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Figure 191 Overview of NTPM cabling variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Figure 192 Interfaces on frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Figure 193 Fixing variants of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Figure 194 Handling of the lever mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Figure 195 Location of the code key no.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Figure 196 Components of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Figure 197 Fitting of the air flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Figure 198 Setup of the rubber sealing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Figure 199 Plug-in of the fan cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Figure 200 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91 . . . . . . . . . . 201

Figure 201 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Figure 202 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Figure 203 Connection of DC and battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Figure 204 Routing of the battery breaker cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Figure 205 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 206 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Figure 207 Example of system cabling with flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 11


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

List of tablesTable 1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension racks . . . . 27

Table 2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Table 3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Table 4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Table 5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Table 6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Table 7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Table 8 Gap between Service1 and Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Table 9 Interrack-cables without extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Table 10 Types of flexible conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Table 11 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Table 12 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Table 13 Pin assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 74Table 14 Pin assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 75

Table 15 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Table 16 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Table 17 Terminal arrangement for external clock connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Table 18 ETHCON trace adapter ports, pin arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Table 19 Pin assignments ACTM connector X1...X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Table 20 Pin assignments ACTM connector X5...X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Table 21 Pin assignments ACTM connector X9, X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Table 22 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Table 23 OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Table 24 OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Table 25 Pin / wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female) . . . . . . . . . 94

Table 26 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Table 27 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Table 28 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Table 29 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Table 30 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Table 31 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Table 32 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Table 33 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . 104

Table 34 Pin assignments of the LMT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Table 35 Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Table 36 Types of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Table 37 Types of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Table 38 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Table 39 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II) . . . . . . . . . 127

Table 40 Battery charging modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Table 41 Selection of slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Table 42 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Table 43 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Table 44 List of temp-resistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Table 45 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


12 DN0932994


Id:0900d80580890e12

Confidential

Table 46 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Table 47 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

145

Table 48 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Table 49 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Table 50 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Table 51 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)

152

Table 52 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)

153

Table 53 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . 154

Table 54 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . .

156

Table 55 Example for CAN-Bus cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Table 56 CAN bus cabling between BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Table 57 CAN bus cables for BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Table 58 List of CC-link cables BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Table 59 List of CC-link cables BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Table 60 CC-link cables of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Table 61 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Table 62 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Table 63 Battery cable kits for connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 racks . . . . 167

Table 64 Overview of the tempresistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Table 65 Battery cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 racks .

169

Table 66 Overview of the tempresistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Table 67 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3) . . 172

Table 68 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) . 173

Table 69 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets) .

181

Table 70 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets) . 181

Table 71 CC-cables l=3,20 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) . 185

Table 72 CC-cables l=6,10 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) . 186

Table 73 Overview of Can-Bus cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Table 74 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units

192

Table 75 Pin assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Table 76 Pin assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT 195

Table 77 Module HW code key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Table 78 Relations between cover parts and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Table 79 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Table 80 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Table 81 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, system cables ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU . . . . . 208

Table 82 Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Table 83 Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Table 84 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 13


Summary of changes

Id:0900d805805c3a78

Confidential

Summary of changesChanges between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document

issue contains all changes made to previous issues.

Issue 01 for release RG10(BSS)

Issue Date Summary

01 07/2009 First edition for release RG10(BSS)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


14 DN0932994


Id:0900d805805c3a78

Confidential

Summary of changes

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 15


Introduction

Id:0900d805805c36f7

Confidential

1 Introduction

f Important!

The CE declaration of conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the setup and cabling

is undertaken in accordance with the specification in the manual and the documentation

listed there, such as mounting instructions, cable lists etc. Where necessary, project-

specific documentation should be taken into account.

Deviations from the specifications or independent changes during setup, such as use of

cable types with lower screening values, for example, can lead to the CE requirements

being violated. In such cases the CE declaration of conformity is invalidated and the

responsibility passes to the person who has caused the deviations.

The applying technical standards are listed in the “Guide to Documentation”

(Siemens document number A30808-X3247-K52-*-7635).

1.1 Purpose of the manual

This document is intended to provide the information necessary for the installation of the

BS-240 / BS-240 II and BS-240XL / BS-240XL II in the Base Station System ( BSS).

It contains a description of all the necessary steps to install the BTS on site and integrate

it into the required infrastructure. The document includes information on the following:

– Equipment delivery

– Preliminary checks

– Unpacking the racks and devices

– Rack installation

in addition to information regarding the connection of the base station to:

– Power supply

– PCM - Network

– Site ground system

– Receive / transmit antenna system

– Alarm connections

– Mechanical and electrical connection of the racks

For installation of equipment not supplied by Siemens (battery chargers, antennas,

power supplies, microwave etc.) refer to site specific documentation or vendor instruc-

tions provided with other equipment.

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


16 DN0932994


Id:0900d805805c36f7

Confidential

Introduction

1.2 Installation prerequisites

It is required that the installer pays attention to all relevant national EMC standards.

– EMF standard relevant for the choice of the antenna, the placement of the antennas

and the max. output power of the BTS (cell coverage).

– Use the correct material as described in this manual.

– Installation according to the standards EN 50310 or ETS 300253, EN 50154 and the

hints in this manual.

– The other equipment on site must be CE designated and must provide interfaces for

connecting of external cables conformable to EMC instructions.

The installation staff should have a basic knowledge of the relevant standards. The

installation manual must be available for staff on site.

1.3 Handling of the modules

All boards and modules must be handled with extreme care as each one contains elec-

trostatically sensitive devices (ESD). The modules are marked with the ESD-label.

These are sensitive to static discharge.

Figure 1 ESD Symbol

Notice:

– Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment. – When handling the modules, do not touch connector contacts.

– An ground high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling modules.

– Use the socket at the racks for wrist strap connection.

– The modules must be transported in appropriate packaging.

Figure 2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 17


Introduction

Id:0900d805805c36f7

Confidential

Figure 3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


18 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Base station installation

2 Base station installation

2.1 Position in the systemThe BS-240/240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II interconnects the MS via the Um interface

with the trunk network via the Abis interface.

Figure 4 Position of the base station within the SBS

2.2 Site requirements

The installation site must fulfill installation rules according to ETS 300253 or EN 50310

and EN 50174.

The lightning protection measures must be in accordance with IEC 61312, IEC 61024and IEC 61663 (in the future series IEC 62305-3 to IEC 62305-5) to achieve a lightning

protection zone 1 interface to the communication equipment.

With regard to explosion hazards, the installation room of the base transceiver station

with integral battery back-up system must be guarantee a continuous ventilation, to

keep the critical hydrogen concentration below 4% vol.

The cross section of the air inlet / outlet must be calculated in accordance to

IEC/EN50272-2.

The construction of the room in which the base transceiver station is to be housed must

be complete and the room in good condition and dry (the humidity must not exceed 60

%), heaters if necessary, should be placed inside the room.

The BS-240 / 240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II are intended to be installed in an area with

restricted access.

It is important, that the installation site and the transportation route meets the valid floor

load requirements. If the floor load rating is unknown, be sure to find out with a building

engineer or another appropriate professional during the site acquisition.

Prior to the commencement of installation, the site must have been prepared as follows:

– The installing room should be free from possible water ingress, frost and excessive

insect attacks.

– Doors and windows must already have been installed and must be lockable.

– Openings in walls, ceiling or floor - if required - must be complete.

– Room lighting and wall outlets must have been installed.

Um

Abis

interface

Asub

interface

A

interface

SB S

BT S BS C T RA U MS C

interface

MobileStatio n

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 19



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

– Heating or air-conditioning systems should be ready for operation.

– Walls and ceilings should have been painted. The room must be clean.

– A minimum floor space of 1,70 m x 1,50 m must be provided

(if later extension is not foreseen). – Cable runways should be installed first.

– All installation works of 3 phase 230 V AC power supply, including the circuit

breakers in the AC-distribution panel (mechanically coupled), must be finished.

To prevent subsequent accumulation of dust and dirt, the parts and equipment units to

be installed should be unpacked outside the room (if possible).

After that it is advantageous to install the BTS, after all other installation works to create

the required infrastructure (power supply, antenna cabling, PCM line...) are complete.

2.3 Site configuration

Operation of the base station requires additional equipment on site:

Figure 5 Site configuration

2.4 Construction overview of the BS-types

The base station equipment of the BS-240 / 240 II is housed in racks with the dimen-

sions of 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D). The overall dimensions of the BS-

240 IIB are 1530 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D). The Base rack and each optional

Extension rack can be equipped with up to 8 Carrier Units.

The base rack and the extension rack of the BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240XL IIB can be

equipped with up to 12 Carrier Units. The dimensions of a BS-240XL / 240 XL II rack are

2025 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D) and BS-240XL IIB 1831 mm x 600 mm x 450

mm (HxWxD).

TX/RX antennas

external alarms**

3 x 230V/50Hz AC

PCM24/30 2 Mbit/s

AC-counter/ main breakers

microwave outdoor unit *

*dependent on type of network integration

**optional

(or -48 V DC)

in power distribution box

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


20 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


For a full-featured Base Station, the maximum number of TRX is limited to 24 with CUs

and 48 with the use of FCUs.

The necessary space for installation is shown in Figure 27. Because of the flexible con-

figuration, several cable kits will be used for cable connections between the racks.The first rack of Base Station is called Base rack and contains the following modules:

Generic modules:

Core Basis (COBA): Essential components are the base core controller (BCC), the

advanced clock generation (ACLK), the carrier unit interfaces (CC-Link), the PCM30/24

Abis interfaces, the internal system alarm interface, the LMT interface and an interface

to one satellite (COSA) to expand the COBA.

The priority tasks of the module are the local controlling of the BTSE, the generating of

system clocks, providing all interfaces, routing data to the CU and handling and provid-

ing O&M messages.

Core Satellite (COSA): The task of the COSA is to expand the number of Abis interfaces

and CC-links of the core. The essential components are the framing and line interface

(FALC) that provides the PCM30/24 port, the serial interface controller (SELIC) provid-

ing the CU-interface and the BUS-interface to the COBA. The COSA will be controlled

via a satellite interface by the COBA. To apply the feature cross connect, a COSA has

to be installed always into the base rack.

Alarm Collection Terminal (ACT): Collect all alarms for those units having no access to

the CAN-Bus and pass them via CAN-Bus interface to COBA.

Overvoltage Protection and Tracer (OVPT): Protects the PMC30 ports of core boards

from overvoltage and provides the monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines.

Abis Connection Module (ABISCON): Provides the interface between the base rack and

the peripheral Abis-cables. The ABISCON carries monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines and serves as interface for external synchronization clock.

Carrier related modules:

Carrier Unit (CU): Consists of a receiving and transmitting part with synthesizer and

power amplifier, a signal processing unit as well as a power supply unit.

EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU): CU with supporting EDGE functionality in the up- and down

link.

Flex Carrier Unit (FCU): The FlexCU is a two-carrier unit and based on the ECU. The

FCU allows the expansion of the number of TRX per BTSE up to max. 48.

Antenna Combining Modules:

Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler (DUAMCO): The DUAMCO consists of two identical

modules. Each module contains a duplex filter, that combines the TX and RX path

together, to be fed a common antenna. If more than 2 carriers have to be combined to

a antenna system (with DUAMCO 2:2), a DUAMCO 4:2 or DUAMCO 8:2 has to be used.

Flexible Duplexer and Multicoupler (FDUAMCO): For each frequency band one type

of the FDUAMCO unit is available, that can be configurated with jumper cables for the

One-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 2.2) or Two-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 4:2). To provide

a DUAMCO 8:2 functionality, a COAMCO8 is required in addition to the FDUAMCO.

Co-Duplexer and Multicoupler Extension (COAMCO8): The COAMCO8 is used with a

FDUAMCO together to provide a 8:2 configuration.

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 21



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Filter Combiner (FICOM): One base module of the FICOM is needed per cell and is able

to combine the TX path of two carriers to one antenna. The base module can be

expanded with up to 3 expansion modules if more than 2 carriers should be combined

to one antenna. The expansion modules is able to combine 2 carriers in addition. In

maximum 8 carrier, that belongs to the same cell can be combined to one antenna.

DI-Amplifier Multicoupler (DIAMCO): The DIAMCO consists of two independend

modules. Every module contains an RX-filter, a low noise amplifier (LNA), an attenuator,

a second LNA and a power splitter. The DIAMCO splits the RX antenna signal and can

drive up to 8 receiver inputs. Via the antenna feeder cable the DC power for the tower

mounted amplifier will be delivered by the DIAMCO.

High Power Duplexer (HPDU): The main task of the HPDU is to combine the TX- and

the RX-path to one antenna, in order to minimize the number of antennas if the FICOM

module is used.

Multiple Duplexer (MDUX / HYBRID6): The MDUX unit consists of six identical

Modules (0…5), each having transmit and receive path with one antenna port. Eachmodule has one TX input, four RX outputs and one RX cascading output. For each

MDUX two HYBRID6 are available to change the standard 6:6 configuration to 12:6.

For the Base Rack to function a Service Rack can be installed close to the Base Rack.

If only one Service Rack is located on site, it contains all infrastructure equipment:

AC/DC Converter (ACDC): Converts the AC mains voltage into the -48 Vdc supply

voltage.

Link Equipment (LE): Can be NTPM, if terrestrial line is used for the connection to BSC

or microwave units.

Backup Batteries: Guarantees continuous operation for a certain time in case of mains

breakdown or AC/DC converter failure.

g NOTE

All empty slots in a partially equipped subrack must be closed with cover plates so that

the air flow inside the rack will not be affected.

Cover plates are not necessary for link equipment and empty battery trays.

2.4.1 Rack configuration of different BS-variants

The following rack types exist:

– Base rack: Contains the core modules, up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II / 240IIB)

or up to 12 carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB ) and antenna combiners.

– Extension rack: Contains up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB) or up to 12

carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB) and antenna combiners.

– Service1 rack: Contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and l ink equipment in

flexible configuration.

– Service1A rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains up to 6 AC/DC converters, an

AC/DC distribution panel with Alarm Collection Terminal, backup batteries and link

equipment in flexible configuration.

– Service2 rack: Contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configura-

tion.

– Service2 rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains a DC-LE Breaker Panel with Alarm

Collection Terminal, backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration.

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


22 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


The minimum configuration for a BS-240 / 240 II with a maximum of 8 carrier units

requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the case

of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).

The serving of a site with the maximum number of carrier units (24) requires the Baserack, 2 Extension racks and a Service1 / Service1A rack.

For extension of link equipment or battery backup, additional Service2 racks can be

added.

The BS-240 / 240 II site can consists of up to a maximum of 8 racks (Base rack, 2 Exten-

sion racks, Service1/Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).

The minimum configuration for a BS-240XL / 240XL II with maximum 12 carrier units

requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the case

of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).

The serving of a site with the max. number of carrier units (24) requires the Extension

rack. For extension of link equipment or battery backup time, additional Service2 racks

can be added.

The number of Service racks depends on the number of installed carriers on site, the

volume of required link equipment and the expected battery backup time.

The BS-240XL / 240XL II site can consists of a maximum of 7 racks (Base rack, Exten-

sion rack, Service1 rack / Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).

2.4.1.1 Rack configurations BS-240

Figure 6 shows the an example of rack types, that are needed for a BS-240 site with up

to 16 carriers.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 23



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 6 Rack types of the BS-240

Figure 7 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240

LMT

ETHERNET

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

CU#0

CU#1

CU

#2CU#3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7 M

U C O

# 0

M U

C O

# 1

C O B A 0

C O S A 0

C O B A

1

C O S A

1

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

CU#0

CU#1

CU

#2CU#3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7 M

U C O

# 0

M U

C O

# 1

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4LE 5

AC/DC

CTRL

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

00 01 02 03 04 05

AC + DC Distribution

Base Rack Extension RackService1 Rack

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

00 01 02 03 04 05


DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

00 01 02 03 04 05


DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

00 01 02 03 04 05


AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

10 11 12 13 14 15


DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

00 01 02 03 04 05


AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

10 11 12 13 14 15


LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

LE 7

LE 8

LE 9

LE 10

LE 11

LE 6

AC/DC

CTRL

AC/DC

CTRL

AC/DC

CTRL

AC/DC

CTRL

AC/DC

CTRL

AC/DC

CTRL

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

AC/DC

00 01 02 03 04 05


AC/DC

CTRL

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


24 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 8 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

LE 7

LE 8

LE 9

LE 10

LE 11

LE 6

LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

LE 7

LE 8

LE 9

LE 10

LE 11

LE 6

LE 0

LE 1

LE 2

LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 25



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

2.4.1.2 Rack configurations of the BS-240 II

The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 II is equal to the BS-240.

The rack layouts, are shown in the figure below (example of a 16 carrier site).

Figure 9 Types of BS-240 II racks

g NOTE

If the antenna combining will be done by Multiple Duplexer Units MDUX in conjunction

with the extension modules HYBRID6, one MDUX unit is placed into a double ACOM

slot: MDUX#0 is allocated to the ACOM slots #0 and #1, MDUX#1 is allocated to the

ACOM slots #2 and #3 (see figure above).Unequipped slots have to be closed by cover plates, excepted slots for link equipment

and empty battery trays.

2.4.1.3 Rack configurations of the BS-240 IIB

The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 IIB is equal to the

BS-240 II. The rack layouts, are shown in the following figure. (example of a DC-

supplied 16 carrier site).

SIEMENS

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

CU#0

CU#1

CU

#2CU#3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7 M

U C O #

0

M U C O #

1

C O B A

0

C O S A

0

C O B A

1

C O S A

1

SIEMENS

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

CU#0

CU#1

CU#2

CU#3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7 M

U C O #

0

M U C O #

1

SIEMENS

Base Rack Extension Ra ckServi ce1A Rack

FAN#4 FAN#5

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#2 FAN#3

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06BR07BR08

ACTC

0V -48V BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06

ACTC

0V -48V

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#2 FAN#3

FAN#4 FAN#5

FAN#0 FAN#1

ACTC

- -- + ++ -+

+ -LE

AD Panel

0V -48V

LE Panel (S1A)

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

FAN#0 FAN#1

Serv ice2 Rack

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

180A

BR 33

BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V X29

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


26 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 10 Types of BS-240U IIB racks

2.4.1.4 Rack configurations for BS-240XLThe following types of rack exist:

– Base rack (contains core modules, up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)

– Extension rack (contains up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)

– Service1 rack (contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and link equipment in

flexible configuration)

– Service2 rack (contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configura-

tion)

Refer to Table 1, Table 2, Table 3 for a selection of rack configurations.

DCP

FAN 0 FAN 1

FAN 2 FAN 3

CU

#4

CU

#5

CU

#6

CU

#7

ACOM

#4

CU

#0

CU

#1

CU

#2

CU

#3

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

CORE

DCP

FAN 0 FAN 1

FAN 2 FAN 3

CU

#4

CU

#5

CU

#6

CU

#7

ACOM

#4

CU

#0

CU

#1

CU

#2

CU

#3

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

Base shelter Extension 1 shelter Extension 2 shelter

DCP

FAN 0 FAN 1

FAN 2 FAN 3

CU

#4

CU

#5

CU

#6

CU

#7

ACOM

#4

CU

#0

CU

#1

CU

#2

CU

#3

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 27



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 11 Types of BS-240XL racks

frame no. installed modules Base Rack installed modules Extension rack

4 (top) 4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or

4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or

2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or

4 x FICOM modules

(Base/Expansion modules in

site specific configuration)

4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or

4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or

2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or

4 x FICOM modules

(Base/Expansion modules in

site specific configuration)

3 4 x CU or ECU

2 x DIAMCO

4 x CU or ECU

2 x DIAMCO

2 4 x CU or ECU

2 x DIAMCO

4 x CU or ECU

2 x DIAMCO

1 (down) 4 x CU or ECU

2 x COBA;

2 x COSA

4 x CU or ECU

Table 1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension racks

SIEMENSSIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS

FAN #0 FAN #1

FAN #2 FAN #3FAN #2 FAN #3

FAN #4 FAN #5

FAN #6 FAN #7

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOMACOMACOM

#3#2

CU

#0

CUCUCU

CU CU CU CU

CUCUCUCU#1

#2 #3

#4 #5

#6 #7

#8 #9

#10 #11

C O B A # 0

C O S A # 0

C O B A # 1

C O S A # 1

LMT

ETHERNET DC-PANEL

ACT-C

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

ACOMACOM ACOM ACOM

CU CU CUCU

CU CUCU

CUCU CU CU

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

AC/ DC#00

AC/ DC#01

AC/ DC#02

AC/ DC#03

AC/ DC#04

AC/ DC#05

AC/ DC

#00CTRL

AC/ DC#10

AC/ DC#11

AC/ DC#12

AC/ DC#13

AC/ DC#14

AC/ DC#15

AC/ DC

#01CTRL

AC + DC DISTRIBUTION

#0

#2 #3

#11#10#5#4

#3#2#1

#8

#0

#9

#7#6#1

CU

FAN #2 FAN #3

FAN #0 FAN #1 FAN #0 FAN #1

FAN #4 FAN #5

FAN #6 FAN #7

LE #0LE #1LE #2

LE #3LE #4LE #5

LE #6

LE #7LE #8LE #9

LE #10

LE #11

1/4Battery

1/4

1/4 1/41/4

1/4

1/4

1/4Battery

BatteryBattery Battery

Battery

Battery

Battery

Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension Rack

AC + DC DISTRIBUTION M U C O # 2

M U C O # 3

M U C O # 1

M U C O # 0

M U C O # 3

M U C O # 2

M U C O # 0

M U C O # 1

Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


28 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Service1 rack

frame

no.

type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4 type 5

4 (top) F:AC/DC1/1

2

F:AC/DC1/1

2

F:AC/DC1/1

2

F:AC/DC1/1

2

F:AC/DC1/1

2

3 F:LE F:LE F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2

2 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:LE F:LE F:BATTERY

1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY

DC

Output

Power

up to 4000 W up to 8000 W

Table 2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 rack

Service2 rack

frame no. type 1

(R:BS120)

type 2

(R:BS120)

4 (top) F:LE F:LE

3 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY

2 F:BATTERY F:BATTERY

1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY

Table 3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 rack

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 29



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

2.4.1.5 Rack configurations for BS-240XL II

The rack layouts of the BS-240XL II are shown in the figure below (example of a

24 carrier site).

Figure 12 Types of BS-240XL II racks

g NOTE

If the antenna combining will be done by Multiple Duplexer Units MDUX in conjunction

with the extension modules HYBRID6, one MDUX unit is placed into a double ACOMslot: MDUX#0 is allocated to the ACOM slots #0 and #1, MDUX#1 is allocated to the

ACOM slots #2 and #3 (see figure above).

Unequipped slots have to be closed by cover plates, excepted slots for link equipment

and empty battery trays.

2.4.1.6 Rack configurations for BS-240XL IIB

The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 IIB is equal to the

BS-240 II. The rack layouts, are shown in the following figure. (example of a DC-

supplied 16 carrier site).

SIEMENSSIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS

#1

ACOMACOMACOM

#3#2

CU

#0

CUCUCU

CU CU CU CU

CUCUCUCU#1

#2 #3

#4 #5

#6 #7

#8 #9

#10 #11

A C O M # 4

A C O

M # 5

C O B A # 0

C O S A # 0

C O B A # 1

C O S A # 1

ACOMACOM ACOM ACOM

CU CU CUCU

CU CUCU

CUCU CU CU

#0

#2 #3

#11#10#5#4

#3#2#1

#8

#0

#9

#7#6#1

CU

Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack Extension Rack

FAN#0 FAN#1

ACTC ACTC

FAN#2 FAN#3

FAN#4 FAN#5

FAN#6 FAN#7

FAN#0 FAN#1

ACOM

#0

FAN#2 FAN#3

FAN#4 FAN#5

FAN#6 FAN#7

FAN#0 FAN#1

0V -48V

LE Panel (S1A)

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

HU # 6 for LE

HU # 7 for LE

HU # 8 for LE

HU # 9 for LE

HU # 10 for LE

HU # 11 for LE

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

FAN#2 FAN#3

ACTC

- -- + ++ -+

+ -LEAD Panel

180A

BR33

BE1E2 BE1E2 10-48V X29

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU), EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)or Flex Carrier Unit (FlexCU)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


30 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 13 Types of BS-240XL IIB racks

DCP

FAN 0 FAN 1

FAN 2 FAN 3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7

ACOM #4

CU

#0

CU

#1

CU

#2

CU

#3

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

CORE

FAN 0 FAN 1

FAN 2 FAN 3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7

ACOM #4

CU

#0

CU

#1

CU

#2

CU

#3

ACOM

#0

ACOM

#1

ACOM

#2

ACOM

#3

Base shelter Extension shelter

CU

#8

CU

#9

CU

#10

CU

#11

ACOM

#5

DCP

CU

#8

CU

#9

CU

#10

CU

#11

ACOM

#5

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 31



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

2.5 Equipment delivery

2.5.1 Preliminary checks

A ShockwatchTM -label and a TIP (N) TELLTM-label are fixed at the rack surface in the

case of pallet transportation or at the crate for indication of fallover or strong shocks

during the transport from factory to the site.

If the TIP (N) TELLTM-label arrow is blue, the package has been on the side or tipped

over in transit. If the ShockwatchTM -label is red, the package has been shocked during

transport.

Check that the crate and label are proper condition. In case of evident damage due to

transport, unpack the equipment in presence of an insurance company representative

and promptly claim any damage and inform the shipper for specifying the damage.

Check whether the package is actually addressed to the site and complete.

Figure 14 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label

2.5.2 Rack mounted on a pallet

Unpack the rack according to the following instructions and in accordance with Figure

15.

– Cut the two straps (1).

–

Cut the protection foil along the cardboard corner reinforcement (2) and remove it. – Remove the cardboard reinforcement on the top and from the corners of the rack.

– Unscrew the four fixing claws from the feet of the rack.

– Retain the claws for later floor fixing of the rack.

– Shift the rack carefully from the transportation pallet. A second person is needed for

help and to prevent the fallover of the rack.

f WARNING!

Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps. Pay attention to the

tension of the straps. Use only plate shears.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


32 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


f WARNING!

Do not burn the package, as the burning packaging material may give off toxic gases.

The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).

Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.

Figure 15 Rack mounted on the pallet

Figure 16 Dismounting the rack from the pallet

2.5.3 Rack shipped in a crate

The racks are shipped vertically in wooden crates (or horizontally in case of transporta-

tion by airplane).The crate dimensions for the BS-240 / 240 II are

1800 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm (HxWxD). Depending on the pre-installed modules

inside the racks, the crate can weigh up to approx. 190 kg.

The crate dimensions for the BS-240XL / 240XL II are 2225 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm

(HxWxD).

The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).

Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.

2

1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 33



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

All crates have the following information printed on them for identification of delivery:

– Customer order number

– Serial number of rack or other supplied equipment

– Destination – Gross and net weight

– Overall dimensions (cm)

– Delivery papers

For transportation of the crates from the unloading area into the construction room use

handling aids (for example: fork-lift truck, goods elevator), a second person is needed

for help.

During the unpacking steps, great care must be taken to ensure that the rack is not

scratched or damaged in any way. Unpack the rack according to the following figures.

Figure 17 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover

f WARNING!

Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps.

Pay attention to the tension of the straps. Use only plate shears

– Cut the three straps (see Figure 17) and remove the 10 M4 screws on the top of the

crate (see Figure 17).

– Remove the crates top cover.

– Take out the packing material protecting the rack (see Figure 18).

– Remove the protection to the head and to the base of the rack.

– Open and remove the tubular PE-wrap protecting the rack (see Figure 19).

– Take the rack out of the crate with the aid of the straps around the rack.

– Lift the rack in vertical position.

cut

unscrew

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


34 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 18 Removal of the packing material

Figure 19 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack

Immediately after unpacking the rack, inspect it for damage and report the extent of any

damage to the transportation company.

f WARNING!

The burning of packing material should be avoided, because packaging may give off

toxic gases.

2.5.4 Unpacking of modules and batteries

Proceed the unpacking of modules as follows:

– Open the carton with a suitable knife along the adhesive tape at the top.

– Take the PVC foil bag that contain the module out of the carton.

– Open the PVC protection bag carefully with the knife and take out the module.

Avoid the handling of the modules in high-static environmental. The packing material

should be preserved for possible re-packing in future.

The battery sets of the Service1/2 racks will be shipped in wooden crates, including a

plastic bag that contain cable sets, screws,washers and the connection plates.

Further the parts of the air vent system and the installation instruction.

cut

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 35



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 20 Unpacking of the battery sets

– Cut the tension belts with a plate shear.

– Remove the top cover of the wooden crate. – Take the batteries out of the crate using the battery handles.

2.5.5 Rack installation

Prior starting the rack installation, consult the site documentation to locate the installa-

tion point of the Base Station, the PCM24/30 network termination, AC mains or power

supply unit (if -48Vdc will be provided from external equipment) and the entry of the

antenna cables into the construction room.

Further check the proper installation of the earthing bar and the necessary cable

runways.

If the rack must be moved to the final installation position by crane and for later connec-tion works, it is necessary to remove the top cover of the rack.

Proceed in case of BS-240, BS-240II, BS-240 XL and BS-240 XLII racks as follows:

– Open the rack-door and remove both screws in the upper part of the front of rack.

(see Figure 21).

– Lift up the top cover and slide it back.

– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.

f WARNING!

Before opening the rack-door take measures to prevent the rack from falling over!

Note the accident prevention regulations when working with a fork lift truck or crane!

Don‘t remove the crane eyes after the crane transport is finished to guarantee the later

EMI-closeness of the rack!

If the racks stand side by side, they must be screwed together to one common unit with

one nut and screw M8x20 (part of MK:EMCRV1 for rack type I or MK:EMCR-2V1 for

rack type II). For this purpose the top cover has to be removed as shown in the figure

Figure 21.

cut

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


36 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 21 Removal of top cover for crane eye access

For BS-240 II/ BS-240XL II rack type proceed as follows:

– Open the rack-door (see Figure 22): Slide down the top cover (1), push the button

behind the cover (2) and flap out the handle (3).

– Turn the handle counterclockwise 90° (4).

– Slide the top cover 20 mm in front direction and lift it up (see Figure 23).

– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.

g NOTE

If no Service1A rack is installed on site and the base station is powered by an external

-48VDC source, the green/yellow ground connection wire between the top cover and the

rack is not needed or provided.

Figure 22 Opening of rack door

remo ve the scr ew s

gro und wir e

1

2

3

4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 37



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 23 Removal of the top cover

Remove the top cover (MK:ROOF-2BV1) of the BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB in accor-

dance with the following figures:

• Open the rack door.

• Loosen both M10 nuts behind the door frame.

• Lift up the top cover and retain bolts and screws for later re-fixing of the top cover.

Figure 24 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (1)

Figure 25 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (2)

g NOTE

The top cover is fixed to the rack at the front side only.

1

2

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


38 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 26 Guideline for crane transport

60°

BS-240 / 240XL

65°

BS-240 II / 240XL II

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 39



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 27 Space necessary for installation of base station rack variants

1 6 0 0 m m

450 mm

2350 mm

1700 mm

min. dimensions for double rack solution

600 mm 4 5 0 m m

1900 mm

2 0 2 5 m m

BS-240XL

BS-240

minimum

room height

min. dimensions for 3-rack solution

Note:

BS-240 without earthquake kit close to wall

BS-240 II / 240XL II: 50 mm (without earthquake kit)BS-240 II / 240XL II with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K4119-X: 150 mm

BS-240 XL with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K2131-X: 400 mm

* ) d i s t a n

c e

t o w a l l

BS-240XL: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)

7 5 0 m m

7 5 0 m m

2200 mm

4 5 0 m m

* ) d i s t a n c e

t o w a l l

**) the distance between two racks, side by side must not exceed 1mm

**) **)

**)

500 mm

BS-240 XL without earthquake mounting kit: 50 mm

*) Minimum clearance rear to wall for:

BS-240 II / 240XL II: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)

Minimum clearance by back-to-back assembly for:

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


40 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


f WARNING!

The total weight of rack must not exceed 360 kg (BS-240 / 240 II) or 425 kg

(BS-240XL / 240XL II) respectively when being lifted.For determination the weight refer to section “Technical Data”.

Under no circumstances must the sets of batteries be inserted into the Service Racks

during transportation on site. The doors must be kept closed during transportation.

g NOTE

To prevent the racks from tipping over (product safety) they must be fixed either to a wall

(exepted in earthquake zones) or the floor.

The minimum distance from the rear of the rack to the wall must be considered. It is rec-

ommended to prepare the fixings before moving the rack to its final position.

The four fastening claws, delivered with the rack, can be used for floor fixing of the racks.

Figure 28 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet

Proceed as described in the list below:

– Check the correct vertical rack position, using the spirit level. If the position is incor-

rect, equalize the differences in the floor height by adjusting the rack feet (see Figure

28).

– Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the rack feet (2) for proper floor contact by using

the adjuster feet wrench.

– Push a claw (3) on each of the 4 rack feet and mark the drilling point on the floor.

– Remove the claws and drill the 4 holes and insert the 4 wall plugs (e.g. Fischer

S8GK) into the holes.

– Push the claws on the rack feet and fix them.

Alternatively the rack can be fastened to the wall. The rack has two right angle brackets

on its top rear for mounting to wall (Figure 29, right side). Depending from the rack type,

the necessary minimum distance must be considered from rear of the rack to the wall

(see Figure 27). An right dimensioned additional distance piece can be helpful therefor.

1 2

3

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 41



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 29 Floor and wall mounting of the racks

f WARNING!

In earthquake zones, the fastening to wall is prohibited. Use the earthquake mounting

kit for securing to the floor.

2.5.5.1 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240

For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2086-X) proceed in steps as follows:

– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Figure 31.

– Drill the holes with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the

holes!

– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack

hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.

– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.

– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 18x80 M10 I) into the inserting tool (e.g. Fischer

FZE 18) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.

– Fit bolts M10 (1) with washer (2) through both holes of claw (3) and distance plate

(4). Drive the bolts into the steel plugs as fast as possible. Fix in this way all claws

for the rear side rack feeds first.

– Shift the racks to the correct position, so that each of the rear adjuster feet is placed

in the cutout of a claw.

– Push a claw on each of the front side feeds and fix them with bolts and washers. The

distance plates are not needed for the front side row.

Figure 30 Earthquake mounting kit

12

3

2 x for rearside of rack 2x for frontside of rack

4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


42 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 31 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)

2.5.5.2 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL

For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2131-X) proceed in steps as follows:

– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Figure 32.

– Drill the holes with 22 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the

holes!

– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack


– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.

– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 22x100 M12I) into the inserting tool (e.g. FischerFZE 22) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.

Figure 32 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)

– Check the completeness of the mounting kit according to the following figure and

remove the rear panel of the rack.

0 5 0

4 8 5

5 3 5

6 0 0

6 5 0

1 0 8 5

1 1 3 5

0

463

32,5

Service1 Rack Base Rack

rear

front

rack length 600 mm

r a c k

d e p t h 4 5 0 m m

600 mm

423 mm 423 mm

3 3 5 m m

5 7 , 5 m m

88,5 mm

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 43



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 33 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL

– Remount the adjuster feet, setup the 4 metal angles (1) and fix them with Allan screw

(6) as shown in Figure 34.

Figure 34 Mounting of pos. 1

– Click spring nuts in the extrusions.

– Insert both stiffening parts (2).

– Move the stiffening parts to rear and lateral side to stop.

1

2 2

3 3

4

4

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5 6

1

1

6

6

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


44 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 35 Mounting of stiffening parts (1)

– Slide in the filler plates (3).

– Fix each stiffening part with 12 Allan screws M6 (4).

Figure 36 Mounting of stiffening parts (2)

– Fasten the rack to the steel plugs in the floor with 4 bolts M12 (5).

– Remove the 4 Allan screws (6). It is absolute necessary, that the edge pieces can

work free of strain in the case of earthquake.

– Mount again the rear panel.

g NOTE

The use of the earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL requires a minimum clearance to

the wall of 400 mm.

g NOTE

For mounting the earthquake mounting kit in a service rack, first the battery tray has to

be remounted.applying to your system.

.

f WARNING!

Take measures to prevent the rack falling over during the removal of the adjuster feet

and mounting of the metal angles. A second person is needed for help! The rack door

stay must be locked in the open position using the door stay provided, whilst work is

being performed inside the rack.

6

6

2

34

extrusion

3

63

4

5

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 45



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

2.5.6 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 II (B) / 240XL II (B)

In areas with the possibility of earthquake use the mounting kit for Earthquake Zone 4

Rack (MK:EQ4RV2, S30861-K4119-X). The additional brackets improve the robustness

of the rack against earthquake shocks.

The mounting kit consists of the mechanical parts as shown in the figure below.

Figure 37 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X

2

3 3

1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


46 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Fix the rack to the floor in accordance with Figure 40 in steps as follows:

– Mark the positions of the drilling holes onto the floor.

– Drill holes at the marked points with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 98 mm. Don‘t

pre-drill the holes! – Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack


– Clean out the drilling holes with a vacuum cleaner.

– Put dowels (3) (e.g. HILTI - M12*73 / 20) into the drilling holes and hammer them

until the sleeve is flush with surface (use an inserting tool, if available).

– Place the double claw (1) at its mounting position and fix it with the provided bolts at

the rear dowels (see Figure 38).

– Tighten the bolts to a torque of 60 Nm.

– Shift the rack to the appropriate position, so that each of the rear rack feet is placed

in a cut-out of the double claw (Figure 38).

– Open the rack door. – Insert a claw (2) on each of the front feet and affix them with the M12 bolts to the

dowels in front of the rack (see Figure 39).

– Tighten the connection to a torque of 60 Nm.

Figure 38 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position

3

3

1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 47



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 39 Claws for the front feet before mounting

Figure 40 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit

2 2

(sketch without scale, all measures in mm)

4 6 5

1 4 2 . 5

4 5 0

57.5

485

600

wall

front side

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


48 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


2.5.7 Back-to-back assembly

Back-to-back assembly means all configurations that are not lined up in a connected

row, but with distance between the sidewalls of racks. These configuration are accord-

ing to customer requirements.

The open cable channel for inter-rack cabling from one rack to the other one has to be

closed with an EMI shielded mechanical EMI-kit. In this conduit, the DC-cables, battery

cables and the temp.resistor cables will be routed from one rack to the other.

An U-profile bar above the conduit will be used for routing of the Selic-bus-cables and

CAN-bus-cable. The mechanical equipment and cables necessary for connecting the

racks are part of corresponding mounting kits.

g NOTE

Other configurations with up to 5 m distance are possible and have to be defined for

specific project. In this case additional mechanical support and sleeve equipment as

well as extended cables, described in the following tables, are necessary.

Figure 41 Back-to-back configuration

1 6 0 0 m m

2500 mm

conduitS30861-S2146-S

*)100 mm

*) Minimum clearance for BS-240 II / 240 XL II / 240 XL

750 mm

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 49



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Figure 42 Side-by-side configuration

Figure 43 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2

max. 5 m


4 5 0 m m

7 5 0 m m

profile bar

(Z- clearance of rear to wall, depend on rack type)

Z


2 4 0 0 m m + 2 x Z

1 5 0 0 m m

Service1 Base Extension1

Extension2

profile bar

(Z - clearance of rear to wall,depend on rack type)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


50 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Figure 44 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2

Detailed information about the wall distances (Z) of the different Rack types is described

in the chapter 2.5.5 / Figure 27.

Additional to the standard configurations of back-to-back assembly as shown in the

figures of this section other configuration with distances up to 5 metres are possible.

In this case required components and extended cables have to be defined in accor-

dance to customers requirements depending on length of flexible conduit.

The following tables informs about the mechanical components and typical cables for

extension.Measure “X” is the length of the flexible conduit and means also the additional

cable length.

The relation between cables with Siemens code no. and cable no. is given in Table 9.

conduit 2 4 0 0 m m +

2 x Z

1 5 0 0 m m

Service1 Base Extension1

Service2

profile bar

S30861-S2147-S

( Z - c l e a r a n c e o f r e a r t o w a l l , d e p e n d o n r a c k

t y p e )

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 51



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

Service

2/3

Service

2/2

distance

“X”

Service

2/1

Service

1

Base Extension

1

Extension

2S2/1-S2/2 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3 E2-S2/2

DC cable Rack (33)+X

CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X

Battery cable Rack (110/3,

111/3)+X

(110/4,

111/4)+X

Temp.resitor

cable

Rack 1)

(112/3)

1)

(112/4)

conduit Rack 2)

1) max. distance of AC/DC frame 2,5 m otherwise use up to 5 m cable 112/4

2) type of flexible conduit see Tab.”Types of flexible conduit”

Table 4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack

Service

2/3

Service

2/2

Service

2/1

Service

1

Base Extension

1

distance

“X”

Extension

2

S2/2-E2 S2/1-E2 S1-E2 B-E2 E1-E2

DC cable Rack 1)

(36)+X

CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (248)+X

Selic cable Rack 1)

(277,

278)+X

conduit Rack 2)

1) replace fix installed cable by extended cable (+X)

2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”

Table 5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


52 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


Service

2/2

Service

2/1

Service

1

Base distance

X

Exten-

sion1

Exten-

sion2

S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-E1 S1-E2 B-E1 B-E2

DC cable Rack 1)

(35)+X

1)

(36)+X

CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (246)+X

Battery cable Rack 1)

(277,278

)+X

1)

(277,278

)+X

conduit Rack 2)

1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)


Table 6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack

Service

2/3

Service

2/2

Service

2/1

distance

X

Service

1

Base Exten-

sion

1

Exten-

sion

2

S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-S2/1 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3

DC cable Rack 3)

(33)+X

CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X

Battery cable Rack (110/2+

111/2)+X

(110/3+

111/3)+X

(110/4+

111/4)+X

Temp.resistor cable Rack 1)

(112/2)

2)

(112/3)

2)

(112/3)

conduit Rack 4)

1) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 2,5 m, otherwise use cable 112/3

2) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 5,5 m, otherwise a special must be defined



Table 7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 53



Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential

The following cables with Siemens code no. are typical cables for interrack-cabling

without extension.

The cables 33-36 are fix installed in the Service1 rack and have to be replaced by

extended according to back-to-back configuration. The installation requires the tempo-

rary removal of the plate, located at the top of EMI-panel.

Service

2/3

Service

2/2

Service

2/1

Service

1

distance

X

Base Exten-

sion

1

Exten-

sion

2S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-B S1-E1 S1-E2

DC cable Rack 1)

(34)+X

1)

(35)+X

1)

(36)+X

CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (245)+X (246)+X

conduit Rack 2)



Table 8 Gap between Service1 and Base

cable code no. Siemens code no.

110/2, 111/2 S30864-X211-A47

110/3, 111/3 S30864-X211-A48

110/4, 111/4 S30864-X211-A49

112/2 S30864-X211-A44

112/3 S30864-X211-A45

33 Component of S30864-X211-A29




245 S30864-X210-A11

246 S30864-X210-A12

247 S30864-X210-A13

248 S30864-X210-A14

249 S30864-X210-A15

277 S30864-X210-A2

278 S30864-X210-A2

Table 9 Interrack-cables without extension

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


54 DN0932994


Id:0900d805806f3dbf

Confidential


g NOTE

Each added rack requires a separate ground connection to the nearest grounding bar

on site!

flexible conduit Siemens code no.

type 1 (distance 0,625 m - 2,40 m) C50324-Z200-C22

type 2 (distance 1,25 m - 5,00 m) C50324-Z200-C21

Table 10 Types of flexible conduit

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 55


External cabling activities

Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3 External cabling activities

3.1 OverviewThis chapter provides the information required for installing the external cables between

the Base Station and the infrastructure equipment on site.

The rack cannot function without thefollowing cable connections:

– In case of AC power supply: AC mains terminal block 5 pole - power distribution

panel of 230 Vac, 3-phase supply

– By using of DC power supply: DC mains terminal block 2 pole - power distribution

panel of -48Vdc

– Ground bolts -> ground bar

– Abis interface -> NTPM (in case of transmission via terrestrial lines)

–

Abis interface -> Microwave indoor units (if µW equipment is used for transmission) – Microwave indoor units -> Microwave antennas

– Transmit / receive antenna connectors - antenna system

– Ground strip of antenna cable shields - ground bar

optional:

– Serial interface - signalling link terminal

– Alarm collection terminal - external alarm sensors

All interfaces excepted the antenna connectors are located at the EMI panel below the

top rack cover.

For cable installation the top cover has to be removed. For lift-up remove the bolts in the

top extrusions.

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


56 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base rack

Figure 46 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension rack

ACTM

LPAMSU

OVPT0 OVPT1

PE-Plate

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

-48 VExt.1 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 0...3

Ext.2 CU 4...7

Ext.2 CU 0...4

Serial IF

ground bolts

LPA

MSU

PE-Plate

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

CU 0...3

CU 4...7CAN IN

ground bolts

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 57



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1 rack

Figure 48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 rack

LPA

MSU

PE-Plate

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

CAN IN

ground bolts

LPA

PE-Plate

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

CAN IN

ground bolts

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


58 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base rack

Figure 50 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension rack

ACTM

LPAMSU

OVPT0 OVPT1

PE-Plate

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

-48 VExt.1 CU 8...11

Ext.1 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 0...3Serial IF

ground bolts

LPA

MSU

PE-Plate

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

CU 4...7

CU 8...11CAN IN

CU 0...3

ground bolts

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 59



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 51 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base rack

Figure 52 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension rack

ACTM

LPA

MSU

OVPT0 OVPT1

PE-bolts

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

-48 V

Ext.1 CU 0...3

Ext.1 CU 4...7

Ext.2 CU 0...3

Ext.2 CU 4...7

Serial IF

ground bolts

CAN IN

LPA

MSUPE-bolts

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

CAN IN

CU 0...3

CU 4...7

ground bolts

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


60 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 53 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 rack

Figure 54 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 rack

LPA

MSU

PE-bolts

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

ground bolts

CAN IN

LPA

PE-bolts

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

ground bolts

CAN IN

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 61



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 55 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base rack

Figure 56 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension rack

ACTM

LPA

MSU

OVPT0 OVPT1

PE-bolts

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

-48 V

Ext.1 CU 8...11

Ext.1 CU 0...3

Ext.1 CU 4...7

Serial IF

ground bolts

CAN IN

LPA

MSU

PE-bolts

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

-48 V

CU 8...11

CU 0...3

CU 4...7

ground bolts

CAN IN

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


62 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 57 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL IIB Base rack

Some additional hints for the installation of external cabling:

– The first cable that has to be installed is the ground cable between the main groundbolt on top of the rack and the nearest ground bar on site.

– The second installation step is to connect the ground bolts of the different racks in

series.

– After that all other cables e.g. AC mains, RF cabling or alarm wires can be installed.

– The screen of the RF jumpers has to be grounded before entering the BTSE via the

cable feeding module, see Figure 102.

– If cables are fed through coaxial cable access located at the top of the rack at the

front, the screen has to be grounded like all other coaxial cables.

The following figure shows the location of the external interfaces of the BS-240/240XL

(example of BS-240 with Service1-, Base- and Extension rack).

CU 8...15

CU 16...23 Red

CU 8...15 Red

CU 16...23

CAN-IN

CAN-OUTSerial-IF

PCM 0 PCM 1

ACTM

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 63



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 58 Locations of the connectors for external cables

LMT

ETHERNET

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

ACOM#0

ACOM#1

ACOM#2

ACOM#3

CU#0

CU#1

CU#2

CU#3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7 M

U C O #

0

M U C O

# 1

C O B A

0

C O S A

0

C O B A

1

C O S A

1

LMT

ETHERNET

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

ACOM#0

ACOM#1

ACOM#2

ACOM#3

CU#0

CU#1

CU#2

CU#3

CU#4

CU#5

CU#6

CU#7 M

U C O #

0

M U C O

# 1

Base rack Extension rackService1 rack

LMT

ETHERNET

DC-PANEL

ACT-C

SIEMENS

LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3

LE 4

LE 5

AC/

DC

AC/

DC

AC/

DC

AC/

DC

AC/

DC

AC/

DC

AC/

DC#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5


3 x 230 Vac **

antenna cables

serial interface cable

Abis lines (OVPT PCM0, PCM1)

external alarms / commands

ground cable

microwave

-48 Vdc*

*) only used if an external DC-power supply is available

CTRL#0

**) if an external 3 x 230 V ac power supply source will be used

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


64 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.2 Ground and AC- power supply connections

The racks have to be connected to the site specific ground system before starting the

connection of AC mains cable.

An external ground wire (16 mm2, copper conductor) has to be connected on the upper

left side grounding bolt of the rack which must be attached to the ground bar on site. All

adjoining racks will be grounded using a prefabricated wire bridge and is connected to

top left and right corners of each rack respectively.

If on site a main ground wire (50 mm2, copper conductor) is installed, it is possible to

connect each rack on the shortest way to the main ground using 16 mm2 copper wires.

Connect the racks to the ground system as follows:

– Use the nearest ground bar on site.

– Measure the distances between the connection points of the ground system and the

ground bolt of the rack.

– Cut the cables to the required length. – Remove the cable covering at the end to connect to the ground bolt (length approx.

15 mm) and mount the cable lug M8.

– Connect the prepared cable end to the ground bolt.

– Firmly tighten the nut.

Figure 59 Ground and AC mains connections (example)

f WARNING!

Note, that the connection by screws at the top of racks standing side by side are

mechanical connections only. These connections are not ground connections!

3 x 230 Vac mains

AC distribution

AC counter3 x 25 A main breakers2)

connection to ground

H07-RN F 5 G41)

ground wire bridges

alternative solution for rack grounding 50 mm2 main ground wire

16 mm 2ground wires

1) cross section needed depend on the cable length between

3 x 32 A main breakers3)

external breaker and MSU2) BS-241, BS-240, BS-240XL3) BS-241 II, BS-240 II, BS-240XL II

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 65



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

The figure above shows the recommended cabling for the power supply and ground

connections. The recommended cable types guarantees the proper function of the base

stations, equipped with up to 24 carriers.

An easily accessible disconnect device is incorporated into the AC mains supply wiring.To isolate the mains supply, a circuit breaker has to be fitted in each phase inside the

AC distribution box close to the base station (see Figure 59). The disconnect devices

shall simultaneously interrupt all phase conductors.

A 5-pole terminal block of the MSU, located in the top of Service1 / Service1A rack, is

the connection point for the AC mains cable.

The base station will be powered by 3 x 230 V, 50 Hz, 20 A per phase.

Figure 60 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 rack)

This warning must appear in the original German text:

f WARNING!

Vor Anschluß des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, daß das Kabel

spannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeignete Maß-

nahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.

f WARNING!

AC supplied BTS versions, remotely disconnected from power supply: Service person-

nel must make sure that the external AC circuit breakers (disconnect device) of the

relevant Base Station - which is remotely disconnected from external power - are

switched off before beginning with any Service&Maintenance activities. This is to deen-

ergize the system reliably (electrical shock hazards)

An imprint, located on the front panel of the AC frame gives instruction how to deener-

gize the base station:

To deenergize entire unit:

PE L1L2L3 N

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


66 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


1. “Switch OFF the battery breaker BR33 at the AD-panel of the Service1 to deener-

gize DC circuit”

2. “Switch OFF the AC breakers BR21, BR22, BR23 to deenergize AC circuit”

To connect the BS240/240XL with the AC mains connection point perform the followingsteps:

– Remove the bolts in the top extrusions to loosen the roof.

– Lift-up the roof sections carefully, to avoid damages of the paint coat.

– Refer to the site documentation for information about type and location of the AC dis-

tribution.

– Measure the distance between terminal block of the MSU and AC distribution.

– Cut the cable to the required length.

– Make sure that the protection earth wire (PE) is approx. 2 cm longer as the phase

conductors and the N-wire.

– Remove the insulation of the cable and cut back the wire insulation at the end, that

is to be connected to the terminal block.

– Fix the cable at the strain relief with cable ties.

– Insert the wires into the terminals. Use a screwdriver for opening the terminal

springs. Check that all wires are in fixed position.

3.3 Ground and DC- power supply connections

For connecting the base station with an external -48 Vdc power supply unit a

Service1/Sevice1A Rack is not needed.

Depending on the site-specific power supply configuration, the racks have to be con-

nected directly with the power supply unit or via a power distribution panel.The following figure shows the power supply configuration for the BTS, including a

power distribution panel.

The power supply unit, as shown in Figure 61, is intended to be supplied by a -48 Vdc

centralized battery source. The charging rectifiers must be internally insulated from the

AC mains by insulating transformers.

The positive pole of the backup batteries has to be connected to ground.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 67



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 61 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC

g NOTE

In case of a DC supplied BS-240 II Base and Extension rack, an external DC circuit

breaker with a (recommended) minimum rating of 80 A has to be fitted per rack (see

figure above). The maximum rating is 100 A if an OEM external power supply rack

requires it.

UE -48 V DC +-

main breaker

power supplyunit

50 A

50 mm2

ground bar

DC main wires

H 07 V-R 16 mm 2

(yellow/green)

ground wire

H 07 V-R 35 mm2

2 x H 07 V-R 16 mm2

backupbatteries

battery +0 V poleconnected to ground

DC supply +0 V poleconnected to ground

optionalpower distributionpanel

main ground wire 50 mm2alternative solution for rack grounding

groundwires

2

2 x H 07 V-R 35 mm*)**)***)

80 A

fuse per rack:

**)*)

*) BS-240 / Service2

**) BS-240XL / BS-240 II

***) BS-240XL II

100 A ***)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


68 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Installation of the DC wires is as follows:

– Measure the distance between rack and the power supply unit or power distribution

panel.

– Cut the wires to the required length.

– Remove the cable insulation (length approx. 12 mm) at the ends to be connected to

the terminal block of the MSU (the location is shown in Figure 62).

– Insert the prepared ends into the terminal block.

– Pay attention to the correct polarity of the connection from BTS to the DC output of

the power supply unit.

Figure 62 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240)

For installation of the ground connection proceed as described in section 3.2 of this

manual.

-48 V + 0 V

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 69



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3.4 Abis-interface - PCM link terminal

The Abis interfaces PCM0 and PCM1, located on the EMI panel, provides the commu-

nication links to the neighboring Base Stations or to the controlling BSC.

The Abis interfaces can be terminated with an ABISCON (without Overvoltage Protec-

tion for indoor applications) or with an optional Overvoltage Protections (OVPT) which

protects the boards inside the rack against overvoltage (residual voltage < 1 kV).

Two types of ABISCON/OVPT exist:

– ABISCON/OVPT for 120 Ω cables (balanced)

– ABISCONCX/OVPTCOAX for 75 Ω cables (coaxial)

g NOTE

If the connection point for the Abis line (e.g., NTPM or microwave equipment) is outside

the building where the BTSE is installed, an OVPT module has to be installed always.

Depending on the different cable impedances it is recommended to use:

– Screened cable containing shielded twisted pairs for 100/120 Ω PCM lines

• 09YS(ST)CY 8x2x0.6/1.2

• 09YS(ST)CY 16x2x0.6/1.2-120 GR FRNC

– Coaxial cables for 75 Ω wiring, e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.

g NOTE

Use only twisted pair or coaxial copper cables with braided shielding!

If cables should be used without shielded twisted pairs, do not route up-link and down-

link PCM lines in one common cable.

The maximum cable length depends on the attenuation of the cable, in order to fulf ill therequirements of minimum voltage levels to be provided at Abis interface according to

PCM standards.

The cable shielding must be connected to the relevant ground pins as close as possible

(in order to avoid EMC/RF interfering effects).

3.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm cable impedance

Before starting the connection of the PCM cables at the Abis interface of the OVPT or

the ABISCON, prepare the cables as shown in the figure below.

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


70 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 63 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance

– Cut the cable to the required length (1).

– Cut back the outer insulation approx.13 cm (2).

– Remove approx. 11 cm of the braided shield (3).

– Cut around the outer insulation and shift the insulation ring to the end of the braided

shield (4).Remove the foil shields and the additional plastic wires.

– Remove 6 mm of the wires insulation.

– Wrap the exposed cable screen, that will be attached at the stress relieving bracket.

gNOTE

If screen-clamps should be used, the outer diameter of the PCM cable must not exceed

8 mm. The terminal block of the OVPT/ABISCON allows the connection of wires with a

cross-section range between 0.08 mm2 and 2,5 mm2 (#28 - #12 AWG).

Figure 64 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω)

– Fix the cable at the stress-relieving by straps or screw down the screen clamps.

– Insert the wires into the terminals of the OVPT / ABISCON.

– Insert the additional wire (shielding potential) into one of the ground terminals (e.g.no. 24).

1 543

2

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 71



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

– Lead the additional wire and the uplink and downlink wires on the shortest route (that

means without sleeves) between the stress relieving and the screw terminals.

– All unconnected PCM lines (4 wires per line) must be connected to one of the ground

terminals.

g NOTE

The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 connectors and monitoring inter-

face connectors.

Please make sure that the wires and cables at these connectors are not under mechan-

ical tension - use suitable stress relief measures!

The pin assignments of the ABISCON is equal to the pin assignments of the OVPT and

shown in the following figures.

Figure 65 Abis interface PCM0 pin assignment, 120 Ω)

Figure 66 Abis interface PCM1 pin assignment, 120 Ω)

1 3

2 4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

B A B A B A AB

B A B A B A AB

PCM 4 PCM 3 PCM 2 PCM 1

Down Link = RX

Up Link = TX

25

26

27

28

E X T S Y N C

B

E X T S Y N C

A

1 3

2 4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

B A B A B A AB

B A B A B A AB

PCM 8 PCM 7 PCM 6 PCM 5

Down Link = RX

Up Link = TX

25

26

27

28

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


72 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.4.2 Abis-interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm

The Abis interface to the peripheral link equipment is done by use of 9 1,0/2,3 coaxial

connectors, located at the ABISCONCX or at the OVPTCOAX (shown in Figure 67).

Figure 67 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω)

For Abis cabling with 75 Ω impedance use coaxial cable e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.

The coaxial cables will be prepared as follows:

– Fix a 1,0/2,3-female connector for each PCM-up and down line at the end to be con-

nected to the ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX.

– Connect the prepared cable to the matching connectors.

– Use a torque spanner for 1,0/2,3 connector (35 Ncm).

– Fix the cables at the holes for stress-relieving with cable ties.

g NOTE

The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors. Make sure thatthe wires and cables at these connectors are not fixed under mechanical tension - use

suitable stress relief measures!

holes for stress relieving

PCM lineconnectors

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 73



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

signal coax connector signal coax connector

PCM1-ULA 1 PCM3-DLA 6

PCM1-DLA 2 PCM4-ULA 7


PCM2-DLA 4 EXTSYNCA 9

PCM3-ULA 5 --- ---

Table 11 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω

signal coax connector signal coax connector


PCM5-DLA 2 PCM8-ULA 7


PCM6-DLA 4 --- 9

PCM7-ULA 5 --- ---

Table 12 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


74 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.4.3 Abis-interface without ABISCON / OVPT / ETHCON

Without the ABISCON / OVPT or ETHCON, if these function is not needed, a SUB-D25

female connector is the direct interface for the PCM links.

g NOTE

Without OVPT no monitoring possibility is provided.

Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function

1 PCM 1 - ULA PCM Line 1 Up Link A

14 PCM 1 - ULB PCM Line 1 Up Link B

3 GND/G shield pair 1

2 PCM 1 - DLA PCM Line 1 Down Link A

15 PCM 1 - DLB PCM Line 1 Down Link B
















11 GND/G shield pair 710 PCM 4 - DLA PCM Line 4 Down Link A



12 EXTSYNCA

24 EXTSYNCB

25 GND/G

13 GND/G main cable shield

Table 13 Pin assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 75



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function


14 PCM 5- ULB PCM Line 5 Up Link B



15 PCM 5 - DLB PCM Line 5Down Link B













8 GND/G shield pair 69 PCM 8 - ULA PCM Line 8 Up Link A






12 ---

24 ---

25 GND/G

13 GND/G main cable shield

Table 14 Pin assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


76 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.4.4 Monitoring interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT

The ABISCON / OVPT provides 3 6pin DIN41616 test connectors for monitoring the

PCM lines.

Figure 68 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT

The following tables show the pin assignment for the monitoring interfaces. The pin

arrangement is shown in figure below.

12

34

56

12

34

56

12

34

56

connector 3

connector 2

connector 1

connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name

1- 1 PCM 1 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 3 - ULB

1- 2 PCM 1 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 3 - DLA

1- 3 PCM 1 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 3 - DLB

1- 4 PCM 1 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 4 - ULA

1- 5 PCM 2 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 4 - ULB

1- 6 PCM 2 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 4- DLA

2- 1 PCM 2 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 4- DLB

2- 2 PCM 2 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA

2- 3 PCM 3 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB

Table 15 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 77



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3.4.5 Abis-interface with ETHCON

The ETHCON module allows the connection of Abis lines with copper wires via two Fast

Ethernet interfaces (FE0, FE1) and optical cables via the two optical interfaces (SFP2,

SFP3). The ETHCON is always fitted at the SubD25 plug-in position “PCM 0” as this

connector is the interface to the core module CESCOBA. The ETHCON can only imple-

mented in conjunction with this type of core module.

The following figure gives information of the connector arrangement of the ETHCON

module.

connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name

1- 1 PCM 5 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 7 - ULB

1- 2 PCM 5 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 7 - DLA

1- 3 PCM 5 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 7 - DLB

1- 4 PCM 5 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 8 - ULA

1- 5 PCM 6 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 8 - ULB

1- 6 PCM 6 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 8 - DLA

2- 1 PCM 6 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 8 - DLB

2- 2 PCM 6 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA

2- 3 PCM 7 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB

Table 16 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


78 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 69 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module

A 8-wire / twisted pair copper cable with a nominal impedance of 100 Ohms per pair has

to be used. The cable requires a 8P8C RJ45 plug at the end to be connected to the FE0

/ FE1 interface. A common outer cable screen is mandatory (cable type S/FTP- or

S/UTP).

The interfaces FE0 and FE1 are implemented so a 2nd BTS can be connected in a kind

of physical multidrop configuration.

For optical connections, duplex-fiber-optic cables with multimode fiber type according to

ISO/IEC9314-3 and LC-duplex plug according to IEC61754-20 have to be used.

g NOTE

Pay attention to the minimum bending radius of the optical cables. Fix the cables at

stress relieving facilitys with cable ties.

To allow the connection of fiber-optic cables, SFP-modules have to be inserted into the

cage of ports SFP2 & SFP3. The required SFP-module type has the part-number

V50017-U364-K500.

MonA

MonB

EXT_CLK SYN_C

EXT_CLK SYN_B

EXT_CLK SYN_A

GND

FE 0 FE1

SFP 2

SFP 3

stress relieving clip

ETHCON TRACE

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 79



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 70 ETHCON module, connected via FE0 and FE1

The ETHCON module provides the possibility to connect external balanced or unbal-

anced clock signals to its spring terminal block. Therefore, twisted pair or coaxial copper

cables can be used.

The cables have to be fixed at the stress relieving clip of the ETHCON module‘s cover

part.

The terminal arrangement of the external clock interface EXTCLOCK is given in the fol-

lowing table.

signal terminal

no.

terminal

no.

signal

GND 2 1 Monitoring EXTSYNC A

EXT_CLK_SYNC_A 4 3 Monitoring EXTSYNC B

EXT_CLK_SYNC_B 6 5 EXT_CLK_SYNC_C

Table 17 Terminal arrangement for external clock connection

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


80 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 71 ETHCON, external clock connection

The trace connector of the ETHCON allows the monitoring of ethernet traffic. Therefore,

a 2x6 pin, 1.27mm grid connector is provided.

An adapter called "ETHCON TRACE" (part-number S30861-U2530), that includes

ethernet magnetics and RJ45 connectors has to be attached to the trace connector. The

pinning of the RJ45 sockets is as shown in the following table.

signal pin pin signal

Logical Port 5 RXN A1 B1 Logical Port 5 RXP

Logical Port 5 TXP A2 B2 Logical Port 5 RX center

Logical Port 5 TX center A3 B3 Logical Port 5 TXN

Logical Port 4 TXN A4 B4 Logical Port 4 TXP

Logical Port 4 RXP A5 B5 Logical Port 4 TX center

Logical Port 4 RX center A6 B6 Logical Port 4 RXN

Table 18 ETHCON trace adapter ports, pin arrangement

terminal no.

1

2

3

4

5

6

wire bridge 0.8 mm

twisted pair cable

outer cable shield

terminal no.

1

2

3

4

5

6

wire bridge 0.8 mm

coaxial cable

outer cable shield

spring terminal block

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 81



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 72 ETHCON trace adapter

Port 4 Port 5

lug for temporary fixing

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


82 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.5 Connection of external alarm sensors

3.5.1 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM

The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection

Terminal for Base rack (ACTM).

The ACTM provides 8 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 48

external alarm sensors. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a cross-

section in the range between 0,08 mm2 and 0,5 mm2 (#28 - #20 AWG).

The spring terminals are labelled X1 ... X10, the terminal blocks X1...X8 are used for

connection of external alarm sensors. At the terminal blocks X9 and X10 can be con-

nected up to 8 different electrical consumers (e.g. relays). All cables will be attached to

the stress relieving bracket as shown in the figure below.

The following tables give information on the wiring of the terminals.

g NOTE

For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.

Remove the outer insulation as shown in Figure 63 for proper ground contact of the

cable screen to the stress relieving bracket.

Figure 73 ACTM terminal numbering

Pin no. Signal nameX1

Signal nameX2

Signal nameX3

Signal nameX4

2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND

1 AL42P AL36P AL30P AL24P





Table 19 Pin assignments ACTM connector X1...X4

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 83



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

g NOTE

The signal source of the command outputs on the X1...X8 clamping blocks must be a

switching contact. The resistance of the contacts in closed position must be lower than

100 Ohm.

It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs.

The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation of

the MK:OPEXAL which protects the ACTM against over-voltage.

The ACTM provides at the connectors X9 and X10 the possibility to connect up to 8 relay

contacts (e.g. relays with default contact open).

g NOTE

The switched current must not exceed 100 mA AC/DC (contact closed) and the maximumswitched voltage is limited to 150 V AC or 125 VDC (contact open).

The maximum switching power is 10 W.


Pin no. Signal name

X5

Signal name

X6

Signal name

X7

Signal name

X8

2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND







Table 20 Pin assignments ACTM connector X5...X8

Pin no. Signal name

X1

Signal name

X2

Signal name

X3

Signal name

X4

Table 19 Pin assignments ACTM connector X1...X4 (Cont.)

Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name

1 CMD4_P 1 CMD0_P

2 CMD4_M 2 CMD0_M

3 CMD5_P 3 CMD1_P

4 CMD5_M 4 CMD1_M

Table 21 Pin assignments ACTM connector X9, X10

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


84 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.5.2 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24

The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection

Terminal for Base rack ACTM24.

The ACTM24 provides 4 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 24

external alarm sensors. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a cross-section in the range between 0,08 mm2 and 0,5 mm2 (#28 - #20 AWG).

The spring terminals are labelled X1 ... X4. All cables will be fixed to the copper bracket

of the module for strain relief and grounding of the cable screen with cable ties.

Figure 74 Terminal numbering of the ACTM24

The following table gives information on the pin aasignment of the terminals.

g

NOTE

For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.

Remove the outer insulation for proper ground contact of the cable screen to the stress

relieving bracket.

5 CMD6_P 5 CMD2_P

6 CMD6_M 6 CMD2_M

7 CMD7_P 7 CMD3_P

8 CMD7_M 8 CMD3_M

Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name

Table 21 Pin assignments ACTM connector X9, X10 (Cont.)

Pin no. Signal name

X1

Signal name

X2

Signal name

X3

Signal name

X4

2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND


Table 22 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 85



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

g NOTE

It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs. The alarm source hasto be a open/close contact like a relais contact or switch.

The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation of

the MK:OPEXAL, that protects the ACTM24 against over-voltage.

g NOTE

The switched current must not exceed 100 mA AC/DC (contact closed) and the maximum

switched voltage is limited to 150 V AC or 125 VDC (contact open).

The maximum switching power is 10 W.

3.6 Installation of the mounting kit OPEXAL

If external alarm sensors are placed outside the building, the MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage

Protection for external Alarms) is required.

Each MK:OPEXAL protects up to 10 alarm lines which are connected to the ACTM or

ACTM24 against over-voltage.

Install the MK:OPEXAL in accordance to the following figures.






Pin no. Signal name

X1

Signal name

X2

Signal name

X3

Signal name

X4

Table 22 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4 (Cont.)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


86 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 75 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL

– Drill two holes with 6 mm in diameter and min. 35 mm depth as shown in Figure 76.

– Insert the dowels.

– Attach the MK:OPEXAL to the wall in vertical position and fix it with screws and

washers.

– Connect the cables coming from the external alarm sensors at the left screw termi-

nals of the overvoltage protectors.

– Connect the symmetric pair cables at the right screw terminals of the overvoltage

protectors.

– Attach the ground wire to the yellow / green clamping terminal (see Figure 77).

– Fix all cables with cable ties at the bracket of the MK:OPEXAL

– Route the cables to the ACTM and the ground wire to the PE-plate of the EMI-panel

(see Figure 78).

screw, dowel and washers 6 mm

ground wire

10 symmetric pair

OPEXAL

cables

cable ties

ground terminal(for indoor applications only)

for indoor applications only

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 87



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 76 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL

Figure 77 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL

max. 30 mm / 1.18"from the rack edge

8.66"

27.66"

diameter 6 mm

drill hole depth 35 mm

700mm

220 mm

cables fromexternal alarm sensors

symmetric pair cablesto ACTM

ground wireto PE-plate of EMI panel

Input side Output side

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


88 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 78 Routing of external alarm cables

– Fix external alarm cables with cables ties at the stress relieving bracket, so that a

proper electrical contact between the bracket and the cable screens is guaranteed.

– Attach the ground wire to the bolt at the PE-plate.

– Connect the external alarm cables at the matching spring terminals of the ACTM.

ground boltPE-plate

cable tie

ACTM

stress relieving bracket

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 89



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1

Due to the fact that external alarm sensors are located outside the building, the

MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) that protects up to 10 alarm

lines is required.

Figure 79 Assembly guideline

Fix the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1at the wall is as described in section 3.6.

To connect the internal and external cables perform the following steps:

1. Attach the inter-connection cable (delivered with the OPEXAL10V1) to the Sub D 25

female connector of the OPEXAL10V1.

2. Route the cable to the ACTM module in the EMI-panel of the base rack.

3. Secure the cable two times at the stress relieving facilities of the mounting bar.

4. Fix the inter-connection cable at the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM with cables

ties, so that the ground contact between cable screen and the bracket is provided.

5. Remove the plugs of the connection blocks X3 and X4 to connect the OPEXAL10V1

module no. 0 and X1, X2 to connect the (optional) module 1.

6. Setup the plugs with the connected wires at the matching blocks.

Figure 80 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1

mounting bar

ground terminal

ground wire to PE-plate

OPEXAL10V1

to ACTM

from external alarm sensors

SubD 25optional

module0module1

(MK:OPEXALBV1)

cables from

S30864-X210-A105

S30864-X210-A105

OPEXAL10V1from module 1

from module 0

X1X2X3X4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


90 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X4 Pin Plug X3 Pin

1 blue white/blue 1

white/orange 2

blue 3

orange 4

2 orange white/blue 5

white/orange 6

blue 7

orange 8

3 green white/blue 9white/orange 10

blue 11

orange 12

4 brown white/blue 1

white/orange 2

blue 3

orange 4

5 grey white/blue 5

white/orange 6

blue 7

orange 8

6 black white/blue not used

white/orange not used

blue not used

orange not used

red white/blue not used


blue not used

orange not used

Table 23 OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 91



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

The ground pin of the OPEXAL10V1 has to be connected with the ground terminal,

mounted on the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1 (see Figure 81).

The pre-fabricated wire will be delivered with the OPEXAL10V1.

Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X2 Pin Plug X1 Pin

1 blue white/blue 1

white/orange 2

blue 3

orange 4

2 orange white/blue 5

white/orange 6

blue 7

orange 8

3 green white/blue 9

white/orange 10

blue 11

orange 12

4 brown white/blue 1

white/orange 2

blue 3

orange 4

5 grey white/blue 5

white/orange 6blue 7

orange 8

6 black white/blue not used


blue not used

orange not used

red white/blue not used


blue not used

orange not used

Table 24 OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


92 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 81 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1

The external alarm sensors will be connected with screened twisted-pair cables at the

clamping block of the OPEXAL10V1. The clamping block allows the connection of wires

with a cross section in the range 0,08 - 0,5 mm2. The label of the module gives informa-

tion about the terminal assignment of the clamping block.

In addition, the terminal assignment is displayed in the following figure.

Figure 82 Label with terminal assignment

g NOTE

Do not lay the IN-and OUT cables in parallel.

ground pin

clamping block for connectionof external alarm sensor s

AL29

AL41

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

A L_

P

G N D

A L_

M

AL30

AL42

AL31

AL43

AL32

AL44

AL33

AL45

AL36

AL24

AL37

AL25

AL38

AL26

AL39

AL27

AL40

AL28

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

valid alarm no. for module 0

valid alarm no. for module 1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 93



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3.8 External alarm protection for ACTM (EAP)

If external alarm sensors are placed inside the building and the alarm lines more than

30 m long, the External Alarm Protection (EAP) has to be used.

The EAP module will be mounted on the EMI-panel of the rack as shown in Figure 83.

A mounting bracket (2) is provided for the fixing the module. In addition the mounting kit

MK:HPDURV3 (1) is needed to mount the bracket.

Two prefabricated cables (4, 5) will be used for the connections between the EAP (3)

and the ACTM. Both cables are equipped with a SubD 37 female connector at the end

that will be connected at the EAP module and deisolated wire pairs for the connection

at the spring terminals of the ACTM.

One cable is used for transmission of the external alarms, the other one for transmission

of commands.

Two cables (6, 7) with 20 wire pairs each is needed for the connection between the EAP

module and the site specific alarm distribution panel.These cables must be prepared on site. The end of each cable that should be connected

at the EAP has to be equipped with a SubD-37 female connector.

The pinning of the SubD-D37 connectors of the prefabricated cables and the color code

of the wire pairs is given in the following tables.

Figure 83 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II

ACTM

LPA

MSU

OVPT0 OVPT1

PE-bolts

CAN OUT

CAN TEST

-48 V

Ext.1 CU 0...3

Ext.1 CU 4...7

Ext.2 CU 0...3

Ext.2 CU 4...7

Serial IF

ground bolts

CAN IN

1

2

367

4 5

45

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


94 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Pair No. Color Pin No. Pair No. Color Pin No.

1 white 1 10 red 19

blue 2 grey 20

2 white 3 11 black 21

orange 4 blue 22


green 6 orange 24


brown 8 green 26


grey 10 brown 28

6 red 11 15 black 29

blue 12 grey 30

7 red 13 16 yellow 31

orange 14 blue 32


green 16 orange 34


brown 18 green 36

Table 25 Pin / wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 95



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal

1 white X 10 1 10 red X8 11

blue 2 grey 12

2 white 3 11 black X4 1

orange 4 blue 2


green 6 orange 4


brown 8 green 6

5 white X 8 1 14 black 7grey 2 brown 8

6 red 3 15 black 9

blue X8 4 grey X4 10


orange 6 blue 12

8 red 7 17 yellow X 3 1

green 8 orange 2

9 red 9 18 yellow 3

brown 10 green 4

Table 26 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


96 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal

1 white X 9 1 10 red X5 11

blue 2 grey 12

2 white 3 11 black X6 1

orange X9 4 blue X6 2


green 6 orange 4


brown 8 green 6

5 white X5 1 14 black 7grey 2 brown 8

6 red 3 15 black 9

blue 4 grey 10


orange 6 blue 12

8 red 7 17 yellow X 7 1

green 8 orange 2

9 red 9 18 yellow 3

brown 10 green 4

Table 27 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 97



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3.9 Alarm collection terminal ACTC - internal alarms / DC

supply

The ACTC is used as a connection board to support single connectors for the internal

alarms (FAN, heat exchanger, temperature sensor, rack in service...) and the DC supply

for the FANs, HX heat exchangers, microwave equipment and smoke sensor.

The ACTC is located in the DC panel of each rack (see Figure 84).

Figure 84 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240)

The following tables provides information about the connecting of internal alarm sensors

at the ACTC.

24 1

X36X35X34

X19X18X17

X30X29X28

X33X32X31 X37

X38 X39 X40

X1 X2 X26

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


98 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7

0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)

1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)




5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)


72)

Front side X17, X26 / 11,12 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)8 2) Front side X18, X26 / 9,10 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)

9 Front side X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)

10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)

11 3) Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)

12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)

13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)

14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)

15 Front side X28...36, X26 / 1, 2

(all connected in parallel)

Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)

Notes:

1) “High Active” if OVP is installed

2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side

3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side

4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5

General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax

Table 28 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 99



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 85 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL)

24 1

X36X35X34

X19X18X17

X30X29X28

X33X32X31 X37

X38 X39 X40 X42

X1 X2X26

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7








5 Rear side X43 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (not installed) (High Active)

6 Rear side X44 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (not installed) (High Active)

9 3) Front side X17-X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)

10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)


12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40, X42 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)

13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)


15 Front side X28...X36, X26 / 1, 2

(all connected in parallel)

Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)




4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5


Table 29 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


100 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.10 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 - internal alarms /

DC supply

The ACTC-3 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 II / 240XL II. The board is located

in the DC panel of Base- and Extension rack, AD-panel of Service1A rack and in the LE-

panel of the Service2 rack.

Figure 86 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3

124

X37 X48X45

X20

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7





4 2) Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)

5 2) Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)

6 2) Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)

7 2) Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)

8 2) Front side X45 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)



11 3) Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)

13 2) Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)







Table 30 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 101



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7









8 2) Rear side X44, Front side X45 / 15,16 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (High Active)





13 2) Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)



1) “High Active” if OVP is installed2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side



Table 31 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


102 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential



DC supply

The ACTC-4 collects all internal alarms of the BS-24o II and BS-240XL II racks and is

located at the DC panel of the Base- and Extension racks, AD-panel of each Service1A

rack and at the LE-panel of Service2 rack.


The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors

at the ACTC-4 for BS-240 II.

LMU SMOKE RDO 24 1

X1 X2 X3 X4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 103



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

The spring terminal block of the ACTC allows the connection of wires in a diameter

range of 0.08 mm2... 0.5 mm2

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3, ..., Rack 7


1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)



4 2) Top of PCB X12, Front side X4/ 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)

(if not installed ENVA9)

5 2) Top of PCB X15, Front side X4 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)


6 2) Top of PCB X11, Front side X4 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)


7 2) Top of PCB X14, Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)



(MBR) 5)


(BBR) 5)

11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE)

(High / low Active)

Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low

Active)

12 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 7, 8 6) Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6)

(MAJ) 5)

13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4/ 5,6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High / low

Active)

Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low

Active)


(BCHF) 5)


(48OTB) 5)

1) “High Active” if OVP is installed, 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated

connector at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connector

at the ACTC front, 4) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD pin of link to

AC7DC, 5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet, 6) Enva5 (AL 12) is not avail-

able, if MAJ alarm is activated (X24 jumper setting: pins 1 and 2 connected), General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant

syntax

Table 32 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


104 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


g NOTE

It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connected

to the ACTC-3. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from

external to internal signal ground.

maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA

minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm

If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm Low"-

resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm.


DC supply

The ACTC-5 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks and

is located at the DC panel of the Base- and Extension racks.


The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors

at the ACTC-5 for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB.

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC-5 Base / Extension

Rack 0, 1, 2

0 Front side X3/RDO RDO (High Active)

1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active)



4 2) Top of PCB X12, Front side X4/ 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active)

5 7) Front side X4 / 21, 22 --- (High Active)

6 7) Front side X4 / 19, 20 --- (High Active)

7 Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active)




Table 33 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks

LMU SMOKE RDO 24 1

X1 X2 X3 X4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 105



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

g NOTE

It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connected

to the ACTC-3. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from

external to internal signal ground.

maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA

minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm

If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm Low"-

resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm.

3.13 Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface

A SubD 15 female connector and the RJ45 socket, located at the DC panel of the Base

rack, is the interface for connecting a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for commis-

sioning and maintenance purposes.

11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE) 8)

(High / low Active)


13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4/ 5,6 Enva6 )(High / low Active)

14 Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active)

15 Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active)

2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated connector

at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedi-

cated connector at the ACTC front,5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant

for Service1A cabinet,7) alarms for former FAN4 and FAN5, cannot used as Enva

alarms because not SW supported 8) High active if MK:SMOKEV4 is installed, Low

active if MK:SMOKEV3 is installed General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC-5 Base / Extension

Table 33 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks (Cont.)

Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name

1 --- 6 LMT_SA 11 LMT_RB

2 LMT_TA 7 --- 12 LMT_IB3 LMT_CA 8 GND 13 LMT_SB

4 LMT_RA 9 GND 14 ---

5 LMT_IA 10 LMT_TB 15 ---

Table 34 Pin assignments of the LMT interface

RJ45 Pin No. Signal Name RJ45 Pin No. Signal name

1 10BT_TD+ 2 10BT_TD-

Table 35 Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


106 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3 10BT_RD+ 4 ---

5 --- 6 10BT_RD-

7 --- 8 ---

RJ45 Pin No. Signal Name RJ45 Pin No. Signal name

Table 35 Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface (Cont.)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 107



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3.14 Antenna connections

The BTSE has to be connected to the transmit and receive antennas. The antenna con-

figuration and the required cabling are dependent on the site and the type of combining.

For detailed information refer to the site-specific documentation or use the correspond-ing customer documents.

For installation and service purposes it is useful to know, which hardware is connected

to which cell. The numbering, seen from the top of the antenna pole, starts at an azimuth

angle of 0° (north) and rotates clockwise.

The first existing cell whose beam centre line lies at 0° or more is defined as cell 0 or

sector 0. The next one following in the same direction cell is cell 1 etc.

In case of omni cell the cell no. is 0.

Figure 89 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole)

For detailed antenna configuration, refer to the site-specific documentation.

3.14.1 Preparation of antenna jumper cables

Short jumper cables with a max. diameter 1/2” have to be used for connections between

the antenna cables and the front connectors of the combining modules, because the

thick cables from the antenna are not able to enter the racks.

With regard to the overvoltage protection, it is recommended to ground the outer con-

ductor of antenna feeder cables where they are connected with the jumper cables

outside the BTSE.

sector width 120°

sector angle

directional antenna

pole

sector 0

sector 1

sector 2

N

0°

beam centre line

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


108 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


These jumper cables must be fabricated of 1/2” highly flexible coaxial cable on-site, if no

pre-fabricated cables should be used.

Fabricate the jumper cables in steps as shown in the following figures.

Figure 90 Tools for jumper fabrication

Figure 91 Parts of the connector unit kit (example)

– Measure the distance between the end of the antenna feeder cable and the front

connectors of the combining modules.

connector head

corrugation nut

fitting ring

emery paper

cleaning tissue

heat protection tape

heat shrink sleeve

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 109



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

– Cut the cable to the required length. Do not deform cable outer conductor, by using

too much pressure during the cutting process!

Figure 92 Using the trimming tool

Figure 93 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor

Figure 94 Removal of metal particles

1

2

rotate clockwis e

heat shrink sleeve

fitting ring

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


110 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 95 Assembly of the connector unit

Figure 96 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation

Figure 97 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve

corrugation nut

fitting ring

connector head

20 mm

heat protection tape

heat shrink sleeve

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 111



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 98 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape

The jumper cables must be routed through the cable feeding module forward to the 7/16”

front connectors of DUAMCO/FICOM/MDUX and to N-type male connector of DIAMCO.

g NOTE

Fix the jumper cables at 7/16 connectors with a torque wrench set to 25 Nm.

N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight". There doesn't appear to be a consen-

sus on how much torque this is in detail. Connector suppliers recommends a torque of

approx. 1,00 Nm.

g NOTE

Note that being able to close the doors means that the depth of the right angle connector

is not allowed to exceed 45 mm.

Figure 99 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors

Connect the antenna cables to the combining equipment as follows:

– Unscrew the front part of the cable feeding module.

– Route the antenna jumpers to the rack, which has to be connected.

– For grounding remove outer insulation approx. 20 mm for proper contact with the

metal lids of the cable feeding module (see Figure 102).

remove extra lengthof heat protection tape

hot air stream

max. 1.8”/45 mm

max. 1/2” jumper cablewidth across flats 32

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


112 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


– Feed the jumpers through the cable feeding module forward to the front connectors

of antenna combiners.

– Fix the jumpers at the connectors TX/RX of combiners.

– Bend the jumpers into the correct position for easy closing of cable feeding module. – Screw the front part of the cable feeding module in its original position.

Figure 100 Opening of the cable feeding module

Figure 101 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 113



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 102 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


114 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


3.15 Installation of TMA or MHA

Tower mounted amplifiers and mast head amplifiers are used to reach a BTS sensitivity

better than GSM requirements at the antenna connector and to compensate a high

antenna cable loss.

The TMA/ MHA should placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be supplied

and supervised by the multicoupling equipment (DIAMCO or DUAMCO) in the rack it is

connected to.

When using a DUAMCO as antenna combiner inside the rack, only one feeder cable is

needed between the TMA and the BTS (for both TX and RX signals) due to full duplex

architecture of the TMA / MHA.

Figure 103 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used)

If a FICOM as antenna combiner inside the rack, the TMA is used in conjunction with a

DIAMCO and it only amplifies the overall BTS uplink signal.

Figure 104 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used)

If a TMA used together with HPDU, a DUBIAS is required for powering and signalling of

the TMA.The configuration is shown in figure below and the installation in Figure 105.

Base Rack

DUAMCO CU

TMATMA

TMA TMA

Base Rack

DIAMCO CU

FICOM

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 115



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

Figure 105 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA

Figure 106 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS

3.15.1 Installation of the TMADV1

Two 7/16 female connectors, located at the bottom of the TMADV1 (lettered ANT and

BTS) are the interfaces for connection of the 1/2” antenna jumper cables that connect

the TMADV1 with the antenna and the antenna feeder cable towards to the BTS.

The TMA can be pole-or wall mounted in vertical position only.

The location of the external interfaces is shown in Figure 107.

The mounting of the TMA may be done as follows in accordance with Figure 108.

– While still on ground, join each of the 2 brackets with one screw M8, but leave the

brackets open. Be sure not to loose the remaining 2 screws.

– Position the TMA on the mast/pole and tighten the remaining 2 screws.

– Connect the TMADV1 with the jumper cables to the antenna feeder cable and the

antenna. Do not forget to consider thermal dimensional changes of the antenna

feeder cable.

– Attach the ground wire to the ground screw of the TMADV1 and connect the wire at

nearest grounding facility at the mast or pole. The ground wires eyes must have the

right size for the TMA‘s M8 ground screw and the cable should be have a cross

section not less than 16 mm2.

TMATMA

DIAMCO

FICOMHPDUDUBIAS

RX1RX2

RX8

CU1CU2

CU8

FICOMFrom

RXIN

BIASPATH

TMAto

DIAMCO

ANT1ANT0HPDU2

DIAMCO

RXOUT

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


116 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Figure 107 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA)

g NOTE

Note, that the max. diameter of the mast do not exceed 140 mm, if the fixing material

will be used as shown in the following figure.

Figure 108 TMA with mounting brackets

The TMADV1 may be also mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws (not supplied

with the TMADV1)

The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The proper

way of mounting the TMA on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can only

be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself does probably not

provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.

f WARNING

It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding cable to the

TMA‘s grounding point. Pay attention to the thermals dimensional changes of the

antenna feeder cable.

AN T(input/output

towards TX/RX antenna)

(input/outputtowards BTS)

BT S

grounding point

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 117



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3.15.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx

The Single Tower Mounted Amplifiers (STMAx) and the Dual Tower Mounted Amplifiers

(DTMAx) are the RF units that provide the means to feed the downlink signal to one

TX/RX antenna and to amplify, with low noise figure, the uplink signal coming from thesame TX/RX antenna.

The DTMAx / STMAx should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be

supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is connected to.

Various versions for different frequency bands of the DTMA and DTMARET are avail-

able.

Figure 109 Example of STMAx and DTMAx

Figure 110 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example)

g NOTE

It is recommended to mount the DTMAx and the STMAx at pole or wall in a vertical posi-

tion, so that the ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.

In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) possi-

ble, it depends on the environmental conditions.

The DTMAx and the STMAx provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with

the BTSE (lettered COM) and the antenna (lettered ANT).

Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r

Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


118 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


Each DTMAx / STMAx shall be grounded to the pole, therefore a grounding wire has to

be prepared for each device on site.

The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded

hole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wire cable lug must have theright size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less

than 16 mm2.

The other end of the grounding wire should be safely connected to a well grounded point

on the pole.

Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the

mounting plate (see rear view of the devices). This is the situation just before tightening

the hose clips.

Figure 111 Example of pole mounting with the DTMAx

For the mounting, the following steps can generally be recommended:

1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.

2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.

3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.

4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten (see Figure 111).

5. Remove the tensioning belt.

6. Connect the DTMAx / STMAx via a 1/2” jumper cable to the antenna feeder cable

(connector COM) and to the antenna jumper cable (connector ANT). The torque

must be 25 - 30 Nm.

7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-

tion to a torque of 5 Nm.

8. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is

recommended.

The DTMAx / STMAx may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and

dowels (not supplied with the device).

hose clips

tighten

tighten

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 119



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The proper

way of mounting the device on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can

only be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself probably does

not provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.

g NOTE

It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding wire to the

STMAx / DTMAx nearest grounding point. The cross section of the ground wires should

be not less than 16 mm2.

g NOTE

Pay attention to the thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cables.

f WARNING!

Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights. Do not work without

fall protection equipment.

3.15.3 Installation of the MHA

The mast head amplifier MHA should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. It

will be supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is con-

nected to.

Various versions for different frequency bands of the MHA are available.

g NOTE

It is recommended to mount the MHA at pole or wall in a vertical position, so that the

ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.

In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) possi-

ble, it depends on the environmental conditions.

BTS type MHA type frequency band

BS-24x / BS-4x with MFDUAMCO or

FICOM6

MDTA 850 MHz

MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz

MDDA 1800 MHz

MDPA 1900 MHz

Table 36 Types of the MHA

MHA type frequency band outer dimension in mm (HxWxD)

MDTA 850 MHz 350 x 210 x 100

MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz

MDDA 1800 MHz 295 x 210 x 65

MDPA 1900 MHz

Table 37 Types of the MHA

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


120 DN0932994


Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential


The MHA can be mounted with hose band clips at poles or at the wall with screws and

dowels.

The unit provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with the BTSE (lettered

BTS1 / BTS2) and the antenna (lettered ANT1 / ANT2).The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded

hole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wire cable lug must have the

right size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less

than 16 mm2.

In case of pole mounting, it is recommended to perform the following:

Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the

mounting plate.

1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.

2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.

3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten.

5. Remove the tensioning belt.

6. Connect the MHA with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1

and BTS2) and with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and

ANT2). The torque must be 25 - 30 Nm.

7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-



recommended.

Figure 112 Example of pole mounting

The may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and dowels (not supplied

with the device). In this case proceed as follows:

1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at wall and mark the 4 drilling points.2. Drill the holes with a twisted widia drill (d=8 mm) to a depth of 50 mm.

hose clips

tighten

tighten

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 121



Id:0900d805807bc8d9

Confidential

3. Insert the dowels and fix the MHA with 4 screws M8.

4. Connect the MHA with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1

and BTS2) and with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and

ANT2). The torque must be 25 - 30 Nm.5. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-



recommended.

f WARNING!

Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights. Do not work without

fall protection equipment.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


122 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4 Rack completionThe racks are shipped including equipment components, pre-installed by the manufac-

turer in accordance with customer configuration:

– Sub-rack, which holds several boards and modules

– DC panel

– Backplanes (multi-layer PC-boards, which are mounted at the rear side of the

subrack) and internal cabling

– Heaters and fan units

– Core modules and carrier related modules

– AC/DC converters

– Semi-rigid cables for setup of the system cabling

The following items are planned for installation after setup of the racks on site:

– Backup batteries

– Cabling between the racks (e.g. battery cabling, DC-cabling, CAN-BUS)

– Link equipment

For cable routing from one rack into another one two ways can be used. The CAN-Bus

cables and the SELIC-Bus cables will be routed above the EMI panels.

Without leaving the EMC-protected area (e.g. DC power supply, battery cables), an

interconnection hole in upper area of the side walls of each rack is provided. The holes

are covered by plates for single racks and the end-racks of a row.

The two mounting kits EMC as shown in the following figure contain all of the parts that

are needed for connection of two racks.

Figure 113 Contents of the connection kits

Mount the parts of the connection kits in the following order:

– Loosen the security screws M3 of the cover part (Figure 114) or break out the pre-

perforated part of the appropriate side panel (Figure 115).

– BS-240 / 240XL: Setup the 8 sealing stripes (1) at the edges of the holes of both

adjoined racks. Move the racks close together.

– BS-240 II / 240XL II: Move at first the adjoining racks close together. Push the 4

contact springs (2) over the adjacent edges of both racks.

12

3

4

3

4

MK:EMCRV1 (BS-240 / 240XL) MK:EMCR-2V1 (BS-240 II / 240XL II)

2) Contact springs1) sealing stripes

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 123


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

– Connect the racks to one common unit with nut and screw M8x20 (3) and install the

ground wire (4) between the ground bolts of both racks (Figure 116).

Figure 114 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL)

Figure 115 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II)

Figure 116 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240)

unscrew the 10 screws M3

1

2

2

3

4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


124 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

g NOTE

The rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS120-

2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with with

an interconnection hole in the side panels. From this follows, that cable connectionsbetween racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 125


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.1 Preparation of the top cover

Before starting the connection of external cables, prepare the top cover for later routing

the cables through the cover to the infrastructure equipment on site.

For this purpose the top cover provides removable pieces as shown in the figure below.

The required number of pieces can be removed in easy manner by breaking out at the

perforation. After that refinish the paint coat at all cracks with the paint retouch kit

(Siemens Serial No. A500-C101-B261).

The sharp edges of the break-outs will be covered with the sealing profile tape (Siemens

Serial No. C42127-Z1-C661). It will be delivered in 100 cm sections and must be cutted

in the required length.

Figure 117 Paint retouch of the top cover

Figure 118 Placement of the sealing profile tapes

The EMI-panel of the BS-240 (IIB) and BS-240XL (IIB) racks are covered with the top

cover MK:ROOF-2BV1. It provides at all side3 panels removable pieces for cable

routing.

The required number of pieces has to be cracked out with a side cutter or a metal saw:

The breaking points have to be deburred, to avoid injuries during the cable installation.

sealing profile tape

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


126 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 119 Removable pieces of the MK:ROOF-2BV1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 127


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.2 Overview of battery sets

To enable easier transportation and setup of Service Racks, they can be delivered

without backup batteries. The battery tray can be equipped with different types of bat-

teries. The installed battery type depends on the required backup time. Each battery setconsist of 4 batteries. If a label relevant to the characteristics of the batteries is delivered,

then should be this label placed on the door of the rack.

The following battery types can be installed in the first generation of BS-240 / 240XL.

Table 39 shows the battery types, which can be installed in the racks of BS-240 II and

BS-240XL II.

The charging mode of the battery system has to be selected dependend on the installed

battery type. Therefore the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) with an appropriate

software load has to be connected with the RS 232 interface of the DCBCCTRL.

The following table gives information about the correct selection.

g NOTE

The battery type Oerlicon 12C@2000 and 12CP70 comply to Hawker/Power Safe-

charging mode and not to charging mode of Oerlicon (CP80 & CP10).

Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity

Excide, A400/85 BATTPACKV1 MK:BATTPACKV1 85 Ah

Oerlikon, 12CP80 BATTPACKV2 MK:BATTPACKV2 80 Ah

Oerlikon, 12CP100/19” BATTPACKV3 MK:BATTPACKV3 100 Ah

EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah

Table 38 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL)

Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity

EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah

Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV5 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah

Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV7 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah

Table 39 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II)

battery type charging mode to be selected

Sonnenschein A400/85 select “Sonnenschein”

Oerlicon CP100 select “Oerlicon”Oerlicon CP 80 select “Oerlicon”

Oerlicon 12C@2000 select “Power Safe”

Oerlicon CP70 select “Power Safe”

Hawker 12V92F select “Power Safe”

Table 40 Battery charging modes

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


128 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.3 Installation of backup batteries in service rack

g NOTE

If the rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS120-2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are installed on site, no Service1 or

Service1A rack is used. The battery sets, installed in Service2 racks have to be con-

nected to the DC supply equipment, provided by the customer.

g NOTE

BS-240 / 240 XL: As up to 2 AC/DC frames can be installed in the Service1 rack. An

identification of the AC/DC controllers is needed. The first AC/DC frame is installed in

the upper position.

Dip switches at the front of the AC/DC controller are used for selecting the Slot ID. The

following combinations are not permitted: Slot ID bit 0/1 = “ON/ON” or “OFF/OFF”. The

capacity of the installed battery systems has to be selected at the Dip switch rows of the AC/DC controller. For detailed information refer to ITMN:BTSE.

g NOTE

In a BS-240XL / XL II Service2 rack the extra space must not be used for a fourth set ofbatteries.

If the Service1A / Service2 racks are equipped with battery trays MK:BATTFIXCB,

before setup of the batteries, the spacer strips (1) have to be placed at the rear and the

front edge of the battery tray. Additional spacer blocks (2) are used to provide a distance

of 10 mm between the batteries. They will be fixed at the batteries as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 120 Parts for battery fixing

Slot ID bit 0 Slot ID bit 1

upper frame (AC/DC 1) ON OFF

lower frame (AC/DC 2), if installed OFF ON

Table 41 Selection of slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL)

1

2

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 129


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 121 Placement of the spacer strips

The bracket that fix the batteries inside the battery tray has to be removed, before setup

of the battery set.

A second variant of the battery tray will be equipped with fixing plates to provide space

between the batteries. Proceed in accordance with the following figure:

– Remove the MK:BATTERY from the battery tray before fitting of the batteries.

– Mount the battery fixing plates at the bottom section of the battery tray.

Figure 122 Preparation of the battery tray

g NOTE

Whenever an AC-supplied BTS version in non-operational state is disconnected from

external power supply, i.e. during storage/transport or service & maintenance, the BTS-

internal battery system must be disconnected by switching OFF the common battery

circuit breaker:BR33 (AD panel, Service1 cabinet)

bracket

spacer strips

loosen the screws

MK:BATTERY fixing plate

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


130 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.3.1 Installation of backup batteries type “Excide”

Install and connect the backup batteries “Excide” (formerly “Sonnenschein”) in accor-

dance with Figure 123 and Figure 124 in the following steps:

– Switch OFF the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) and atmounting kit battery (Service2).

– Put on the battery 2 and 3 into the battery tray.

– Connect the short cable with battery 2 (- terminal) and battery 3 (+ terminal).

– Connect one of the long cables at battery 2 (+ terminal) and battery 3 (- terminal)

– Move battery 2 and 3 as far as stop to the rear side of the battery tray.

– Put on battery 1 and 4 into the tray.

– Connect the long cable coming from battery 2 (+ terminal) at battery 1 (- terminal)

and the long cable coming from battery3 (- terminal) at battery 4 (+ terminal).

– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 4 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and

the tempresistorcable to battery 1 (+ terminal).

– Fasten the battery nuts to a torque of 20 Nm. Close and tighten both velcro straps.

– Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during fasten the cables to the battery

terminals (avoid contact of metal).

f WARNING!

Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to

avoid accidental short circuits.

Figure 123 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”

battery2

battery 1

battery3

battery 4

velcro straps

air vent tube s

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 131


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 124 Connection of backup battery set “Excide”

Setup the battery air vent system in accordance with the figure in steps as follows:

– Setup a plastic angle (1) at the air outlet of each battery.

– Fix one of the 4 clear plastic tubes (2) at each angle.

– Connect the tubes of battery 2 and 3 with the T-connector (3).

– Connect the tubes of battery 1 and 4 with cross-connector (4).

– Setup the connection between the T-connector and the cross-connector. Use the

short plastic tube (5).

– Connect the long clear plastic tube (6) at the cross-connector.

– Equip the other end of the tube with the outlet nipple (7).

– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards to the cable feeding module.

– The outlet part will be placed inside the cable feeding module.

– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.

The second T-connector (8) will be used for connecting the air vent system of a second

battery tray.

gNOTEIn order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-

tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in vertical

direction.

+ +

++

1

2 3

4

- 48 V (blue)

+ 0 V (black)

tempresistor cable(color as shown not relevant)

air vent tube, routed via RF cable entry outside the rack

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


132 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 125 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide”

Figure 126 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

2

1

1 1

1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 133


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.3.2 Installation of backup batteries type “Oerlicon”

For installation of an “Oerlicon” battery set proceed in accordance with Figure 127 and

Figure 128 in steps as follows:

– Switch off the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or of ADP(BS-240 II / 240 XL II - Service1A) and mounting kit battery (Service1A / Service2).

– Put on the battery 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.

– Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the - terminal of battery 2 with the short metal

bridge.

– Connect the following batteries in the same way.

– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and

the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).

– Tighten the battery termination fixing screws to a torque with 6 Nm.

– Tighten the cable termination fixing screws to a torque with 20 Nm.

gNOTETurn up the protection cap to the end position, during tighten the cables to the battery

terminals (avoid contact of metal). The battery capacity must be adjusted at the AC/DC

(BS-240 / 240 XL) controller.

f WARNING!

Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to

avoid accidental short circuits.

After all electrical connections are complete, setup the air vent system:

– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2 and 3.

– Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipples of battery 1 and 4.

– Connect the 4 tubes at the collector part (3).

– Connect the long clear plastic tube (4) at the collector part.

– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards through the cable feeding

module.

– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.

g NOTE

In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-

tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in vertical

direction.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


134 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 127 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon)

Figure 128 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set

1 2 3 4

Temp-resistor cable

battery cable -48 V

battery cable +0V

air vent system

++

++

_

_ _ _

1

2

3

4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 135


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.3.3 Installation of backup batteries type “EnerSys / Hawker”

Before starting the installation of the battery sets switch “OFF” the circuit breaker at the

frame AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or at the AD-panel (BS-240 II/240 XL II

- Service1A).

Figure 129 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3

Install and connect the “EnerSys” batteries (formerly “Hawker”) according to Figure 130

and Figure 134 as well as the following steps:

– Place batteries 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.

– Mount the MK:BATTERY in its original position.

– Connect the battery 1 (+ terminal) and battery 2 (- terminal) with the short metal

bridge and tighten the nuts with a torque of 5 Nm.

– Connect the following batteries in the same way.

– Fasten the accompanying protecting caps over the battery terminals.

– Remove the protection cover of the MK:BATTERY.

– Connect the blue load cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and connect the black load

cable and the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).

– Using a wrench set to a torque of 5 Nm, fasten the battery cable nuts.

– Shift the protection caps of both battery cables to the end position to covering of the

battery poles.

Figure 130 Placement and connection of the batteries

switch OFF

bracket

1 2 3 4

+ _

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


136 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 131 Detail of the connection of battery 4

f WARNING!

Use only insulated tools to connect the cables to the battery nuts to avoid accidental

short circuits!

After all of the electrical connections are complete, install the air vent system of the

battery set. It consist of 2,00 m plastic tube and 3 T-collectors. The plastic tube has to

be cutted into pieces with the length as shown in Figure 132:

tempresistor cable

distance piece

“+” pole cable to MK:BATTERY

battery 4

metal bridge

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 137


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 132 Parts of the air vent system

– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) to the air vent connectors of batteries 2,3 and 4.

– Fix the plastic tube (2) at the air vent connector of battery 1.

– Connect the a T-collector part (3) at the tubes of battery 2,3 and 4.

– Attach tube (2) of battery 1 to the T-collector of battery 2.

– Connect the T-collectors of battery 2 - 3 and 3 - 4 with the 100 mm tubes (4).

– Connect the pre-installed plastic tube that is routed to the gas outlet of the rack atthe T-collector of battery 4. Fix the tube at the rack frame with cable ties.

Figure 133 Routing of the air vent tubes

170 mm

100 mm

70 mm

2

1

3

4

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


138 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

The MK:BATTERY has to be connected with the DC input terminals of the AD-panel.

The pre-fabricated cables have to be attached to the “+” pole and the“-” pole of the

MK:BATTERY.Fix the cables at the mounting bars with cable ties as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 134 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection

+

+

_

_

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 139


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.4 Inter-rack cable routing (standard configuration)

This chapter provides information about the cable connections from one rack to another,

dependent on the BS-240 / 240XL or BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types and configurations.

g NOTE


2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with

an interconnection hole in the side panels. From this follows, that cable connections

between racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible, if these rack

types will be used.

4.4.1 Battery cabling of BS-240 / 240XL

An overview of the battery interrack cabling for BS-240 and BS-240XL is provided in the

tables below.

g NOTE

Note: If the Service1 rack is equipped with two frames AC/DC (1 and 2) and only BAT0

and BAT1 should be connected to the AC/DC frames, connect BAT0 with F:AC/DC1 and

BAT1 with F:AC/DC2.

battery

system

battery

cable no.

from to length color

BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-26b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1500 mm blue

111/1 S1-AC/DC1-25b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1500 mm black

BAT 1 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-28b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 2850 mm blue

111/2 S1-AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 2850 mm black


111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 3700 mm blackBAT 3 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4200 mm blue


Table 42 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240)

battery

system

battery

cable no.


BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-20b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1750 mm blue

111/1 S1-AC/DC1-19b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1750 mm black





Table 43 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


140 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 135 Terminal blocks for battery cables



battery

system

temp-resistor-cable

no.

from to length

BAT 0 112/1 S1/BAT0 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T0 2500 mm

BAT 1 112/2 S2/1 BAT1 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T1 2500 mm



Table 44 List of temp-resistor cables

battery

system

battery

cable no.


Table 43 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) (Cont.)

T0

T1

25 26 27 28

a a aa

bbbb

+ +- -

BAT0 BAT1

terminal blockAC/DC1 frame

T0

T1

14 15 16 17

a a aa

bbbb

+ +- -

BAT2 BAT3

terminal blockAC/DC2 frame

a b c

12

terminal block battery frame

0 V

-48 V

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 141


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 136 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL

ϑ ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

frame AC/DC 1

T1 T0

frame AC/DC 2

T1 T0

112/4

110/4111/4

112/3

110/3111/3

112/2

110/2111/2

110/1111/1

112/1

BAT3 BAT2 BAT1 BAT0

top cover air vent air vent air vent air vent

temp-resistor

cable

Service 2/3 Service 2/2 Service2/1 Service1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


142 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.4.2 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

An overview of battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with the AD

panel variant ADPAV3 is shown in the following table.

Cable

No

From To Color Length

m

Factory No.

S30861-*

418 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 1,50 X215-A70

418 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 1,70





422 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 blue 1,71 X215-A74

422 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 1,71

422 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74

422 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 1,71

422 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74

422 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 black 1,71

423 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76

423 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00

423 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76

423 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00

423 /1 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 *2) blue 3,00 X215-A76

423 /2 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00

140 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 blue 1,00 X216-A74

140 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0,60

140 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 blue 1,00 X216-A74

140 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0,60

141 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) blue 0,60141 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0,40

*1) If required, adapt or shorten the cable length

*2) Only in case of XL-Rack: use the longer cable 423 instead the cable 422.

Table 45 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 143


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

f WARNING!

Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,

use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

Figure 137 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

Cable

No

Signal Name From To Factory No.

S30864-*

53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,(+0V) *1)

X216-A92

*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery

installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.

Table 46 Battery sensor cabling

Battery 2

1 6 0 A

6 x HU for LE 0 - 5

Battery 2

Battery 3

1 6 0 A

1

6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

Battery 1 Battery 1

LE panel

AD panel

AC/DC frame

6 x HU for LE 0 - 5

141141

141141

141

422418

140

140140

Service 1Service 2/1

BAT

ϑ

ϑ

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


144 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 138 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3)

Figure 139 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2

Battery 1 Battery 1Battery 1Battery 1

Battery 2 Battery 2

Battery 3

Battery 2

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

HU for LE 0 - 5or

Battery 3

1 6 0 A

HU for LE 0 - 5

423

422

418

141141141141

141141

141

141

422

140140

140

140

Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A

AD panel

LE panel(S1/A)

LE panel (S2)

AC/DC frame

LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)

BAT1)

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

160A

B A

160A

A B

160A

A B

160A

B A

1 8 0 A

A

B B R 3

3

1)

1)

1)

1)

MK:BATTERY 2)

MK:BATTERY 2)

MK:BATTERY 2)

MK:BATTERY 2)

BAT / -48V

BAT / -48V

BAT / -48V

BAT / -48V

from AC/DC system

to subsequent Service2 cabinet

AD panel (ADP)

0V -48V

s e t o f b a t t e r i e s i n

s e t o f b a t t e r i e s i n S e r v i c e 1 A

1) battery breaker alarm line to ACTC

2) MK:BATTERY is integral part of

F:BARTTERY

S e r v i c e 2

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 145


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.4.3 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

The battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with AD panel variant

ADP-2V1 is shown in the following table.

Cable

No

From To Color Length

m

Factory No.

S30861-*

518 /1 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or2 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240;

240XL

blue 1.90 X215-A190

518 /2 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 2.10

519 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240;

240XL

blue 3.10 X215-A191

519 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 3.30

522 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240;

240XL

blue 2.60 X215-A159

522 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.40

522 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 240;

240XL

blue 2.60 X215-A159

522 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 2.40

522 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 240;

240XL

blue 2.60 X215-A159

522 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 black 2.40

523 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240;

240XL

blue 3.00 X215-A160

523 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.70

523 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 240 blue 3.00 X215-A160

523 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 2.70

540 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 240;240XL

blue 0.55 X215-A158

540 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0.55

540 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 240;

240XL

blue 0.55 X215-A158

540 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0.55

541 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) 240;

240XL

blue 0.265 *1)

541 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0.275

*1) only for battery pole with tapped hole M8: S30864-X215-A161; only for battery pole with tapped hole M10:

S30864-X215-A162

Table 47 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

Cable

No

Signal Name From To Factory No.

S30864-*

53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,

(+0V) *1)

X216-A92

*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery

installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.

Table 48 Battery sensor cabling

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


146 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

f WARNING!

Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,

use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

Figure 140 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

Battery 1 Battery 1Battery 1Battery 1

Battery 2 Battery 2

Battery 3

Battery 2

HU for LE 0 - 5or

Battery 3

HU for LE 0 - 5

523

141541541541

541541

541

541

522

540540

540

540

Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A

LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)FAN#0 FAN#1

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

518

540 540

540

540

522

FAN#0 FAN#1

518-1 or 519-1518-2 or

If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2should be used to connect theMK: Battery with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.

B

E2

E1

Batt519-2

*1)

*1)

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 147


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 141 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

Battery 2

6 x HU for LE 0 - 5

Battery 2

Battery 3

Battery 1 Battery 1

6 x HU for LE 0 - 5

541541

541541

541

522518

540

540540

Service 1Service 2/1

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

540

540

540

518-1 or 519-1518-2 or

If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2

should be used to connect theMK:Battery with a Service1A Rack,equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.

B

E2

E1

Batt 519-2

*1)

*1)

ϑ

ϑ

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


148 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.4.4 Battery alarm cable connections

The cable connections of the battery breaker alarm is shown in the circuit diagram

below. The alarm terminals of each MK:Battery within a service rack will be connected

in series to lead them to the alarm-terminal of the ACTC.

Figure 142 Battery alarm cables

C NO NC

160 AA B

1c 1b1a

MK:BATTERY

+ -BAT / -48 V

ACTCDCP:LEBREAK2or ADPA/F:ACTC

C NONC

160 AA B

1c 1b1a

MK:BATTERY

+ -BAT / -48 V

C NONC

160 AA B

1c 1b1a

MK:BATTERY

+ -BAT / -48 V

463

462

463

Service2/n

Cable 462: S30864-X211-A173 (Set: 2 x 462)

Cable 463: S30864-X211-A174

FAN#0 FAN#1

C NO NC

160 AA B

1c 1b1aMK:BATTERY

+ -BAT / -48 V

C NO NC

160 AA B

1c 1b1a

MK:BATTERY

+ -BAT / -48 V

463

462

462

Service1A

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 149


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.4.5 DC cabling between the racks (BS-240 / 240XL)

The DC cabling is required for routing of the -48V voltage from the DC panel of Service1

rack to the DC panels of all installed racks on site for power supply of the boards in Base

and Extension racks and the link equipment inside the Service racks.RF

Figure 143 Routing of the DC power supply wires

Figure 144 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL

Figure 145 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks

unscre w

+0 V -48 V

DC supply wires

33 1)

34 1) 35 1)

36 1)

DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel

Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack Extension2 Rack

terminal block

279 2)

1) Component of MK: CARSV1

2) S30864-X211-A69

http://a20011.pdf/

http://a20011.pdf/

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


150 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 146 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks

cable no. polarity from DC-Panel

Service1 Rack

to rack color

33 0 V-48 V

13b14b

Service 2 / 5bService 2 / 2b

blackblue

34 0 V

-48 V

11b

12b

Base / 9b

Base / 4b

black

blue

35 0 V

-48 V

9b

10b

Extension 1 / 9b

Extension 1 / 4b

black

blue

36 0 V

-48 V

7b

8b

Extension 2 / 9b

Extension 2 / 4b

black

blue

DC- Cabling to further Service2/x


Service2/x Rack

to DC-Panel

Service2/x+1 Rack

color

279 0 V

-48 V

5a

2a

5b

2b

black

blue

Table 49 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks

33 1)

34 1) 35 1)DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel

Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack

279 2)

1) Component of MK: CARSV1 2) S30864-X211-A69

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 151


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential


Service1 Rack

to rack color

33 0 V

-48 V

11b

12b

Service2 / 5b

Service2 / 2b

black

blue

34 0 V

-48 V

9b

10b

Base / 10b

Base / 5b

black

blue

35 0 V

-48 V

7b

8b

Extension1 / 8b

Extension1 / 4b

black

blue

DC- Cabling to further Service2/x


Service2/x Rack

to DC-Panel

Service2/x+1 Rack

color

279 0 V

-48 V

5a

2a

5b

2b

black

blue

Table 50 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


152 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.4.6 DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

The figure below shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel

ADPAV3 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of BS-240 II / 240XL II.

Figure 147 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)

f WARNING!

Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use

only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power

supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a

Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.

BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06BR07BR08

ACTC0V-48V

+ ++

Service1 A Base Extension1 Extension2

415

413 415

414

414

413

DC panel

ACTC

- -- -+

+ -

LE

180A

BE1E2 BE1E2BAT0 1

12

X29

BR 33

Service Socket

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06

ACTC0V-48V

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05BR06

ACTC0V-48V

DC panel

FAN0 FAN1

FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1 FAN0 FAN1 AC/DC

AD-Panel ADPAV3

cable

no.

polarity from to rack color Factory-

No.

S30864-*

Length

m

413/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A56 1,50

413/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black

414/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 blue X215-A57 2,20

414/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black


415/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black

Table 51 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 153


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.4.7 -48V DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

The following figure shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel

ADP-2V1 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of the BS-240 II / 240XL II.

Figure 148 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)

fWARNING!

Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use

only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power

supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a

Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.

CU#0

CU#1

CU#4

CU#5 C

O B A

0

C O S A 0

C O B A

1

C O S A

1

CU#0

CU#1

CU#4

CU#5

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#2 FAN#3

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#2 FAN#3

FAN#0 FAN#1

DC-Panel DC-Panel AD-Panel ADP-2V1

513-1513-2

514-1514-2

515-1515-2

CU#0

CU#1

CU#4

CU#5

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#2 FAN#3

If the cables 513 - 515 1/2should be used to connect theBase- and Extension Racks with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.

DC-Panel

513-2

513-1

514-2

514-1

515-2

515-1DCP:LEBREAK

B

E2

E1

Batt

cable

no.


No.

S30864-*

Length

m

513/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A192 1,15

513/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black 1,10


514/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black 1,70


515/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black 2,30

Table 52 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


154 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.4.8 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to

the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-

necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example ofDC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurations

are listed in Table 53. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,

the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.

The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.

Figure 149 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

ACTC

0V-48V

+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK2

Service1A

AC/DC frame

406406

402

Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1

403

1)

403

2)

4033)

4034)

2): if Service1A without DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment3), 4): if Service 2/1 with additional second DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment

for 1), 2), 3) and 4) see also table below

+ ++

ACTC

- -- -+

+ -

LE

180A

BE1E2 BE1E2BAT0 1

12

X29

BR 33

AD Panel

Service Socket

0V

LE breaker

-48V

+ + - -

FAN0 FAN1

ACTC

0V -48V

X10

+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK

ACTC

0V-48V

+ -X10

DCP:LEBREAK2 ACTC

0V-48V

+ -X10

DCP:LEBREAK2

+ -

cable

no.


No.

S30864-*

Length

m

402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A40 1,20

0 V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black

403, 1) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 blue X215-A41 1,20

0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 black

403, 2) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:ADP:x29:1 blue X215-A41 1,20

0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:ADP:x29:2 black

403, 3) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A41 1,20

0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black

403, 4) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A41 1,20

0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black

Table 53 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 155


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.4.9 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to

the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-

necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example of

DC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurations

are listed in Table 54. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,

the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.

The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.

Figure 150 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

406 -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80

0 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black

406 -48 V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80


cable

no.


No.

S30864-*

Length

m

Table 53 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) (Cont.)

CU#0

CU#1

CU#4

CU#5 C

O B A

0

C O S A 0

C O B A

1

C O S A 1

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#2 FAN#3

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

DC-Panel AD-Panel

FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

33/M

402

503

Service2 Rack

X29

F:ACTC

DCP:LEBREAKX10

DCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK

X10X10

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

with LE in Service1A

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


156 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 151 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

CU#0

CU#1

CU#4

CU#5 C

O B A

0

C O S A 0

C O B A

1

C O S A 1

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#2 FAN#3

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service1A Rack Base Rack

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

DC-Panel AD-Panel

FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

33/M 503

X29

F:ACTCDCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK

X10X10

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

Service2 Rack Service2 Rack

1 6 0 A

without LE in Service1A

cable

no.


No.

S30864-*

Length

m

402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215-A40 1,20

0 V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black

503 -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215-

A164

1,30

0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black

33/M -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211-

A152

0,90


33/M -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211-

A152

0,90


Table 54 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 157


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.4.10 CAN-Bus connections BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II

The CAN-Bus will be routed in loop configuration through the racks to collect external

and internal alarms and lead them to the ACT of the Base rack.

The configuration rules for CAN-Bus connections are valid for BS-240 / BS-240XL and

BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types.

The assignment of the cable length to the rack configuration is dependent on the

mounting sequence. The CAN-Bus must be terminated at the end (CAN OUT) with the

terminating resistor S30861-K2047-K. This measure is mandatory.

The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guided

inside the Rack roof/cover area.

The Table 55 and the Figure 153 show an example of CAN-Bus connections.

Figure 152 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces

cable no. from CAN OUT to CAN IN Code no. length

245 Base Service1 S30864-X210-A11 1200 mm

246 Service1/ Service1A Extension1 S30864-X210-A12 1900 mm

247 Extension1 Service2/1 S30864-X210-A13 2600 mm

248 Service2/1 Extension2 S30864-X210-A14 3300 mm

249 Extension2 Service2/2 S30864-X210-A15 4000 mm

Cables for configurations with distance between

the cabinets

S30864-X210-A60 6800 mm

S30864-X210-A61 7800 mm

S30864-X210-A63 5000 mm

S30864-X210-A66 12000 mm

Table 55 Example for CAN-Bus cabling

C A N

I N

C A N O U

T

C A N T E

S T

a t i n

g r e

s i s t o r

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


158 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 153 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections

4.4.11 CAN-Bus cabling of 240 IIB, BS-240XL IIB

The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guided

inside the Rack roof/cover area. Therefore, pre-fabricated cables have to be used.

The cable routing is illustrated by the following figures. The CAN-bus has to be termi-

nated with a termination resistor, delivered with the Base rack together.

Figure 154 CAN-bus connectors on the top of the rack

Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1 Base Extension1 Extension2

245

246

248

249

247

CAN OUT

CAN IN

CAN TEST LPA

terminatingresistor

rear side

(for BS-240/-240II only)

- 48 V

SERIAL IF CAN OUT

CAN IN

CAN TEST LPA

- 48 V

SERIAL IF CAN OUT

CAN IN

CAN TEST LPA

- 48 V

SERIAL IF

EMI-P: RS EMI-P: RB EMI-P: RE

front side of racks

of racks

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 159


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 155 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240 IIB racks

Figure 156 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240XL IIB racks

The following Can bus cable can be ordered:

4.4.12 CC-Link cabling of BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II

The SELIC-cabling (CC-link) provides a connection between the core modules in the

Base rack and the carrier units in the Extension racks.These connections are absolute

required for transmission of signalling and alarms between the racks. The interfaces are

located on the EMI panel of Base- and Extension racks.

In a standard configuration the same type of racks will be connected only. For each con-

nection (Base to Extension1/2), prefabricated cables are provided. These cables

(S30864-X210-A2, -A23, -A38) are component of the relevant Extension racks.

cable no. from to

14 CAN out Base rack CAN in Extension 1

CAN out Extension 1 * CAN in Extension 2 *

*) BS-240 IIB only

Table 56 CAN bus cabling between BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks

cable length factory no.

1,90 m S30864-X210-A12

3,30 m S30864-X210-A14

12,00 m S30864-X210-A66

Table 57 CAN bus cables for BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks

CAN OUT

CAN IN

CAN OUT

CAN IN

CAN OUT

termination resistor

BASE EXTENSION 1 EXTENSION 2

EMI-panel EMI-panel EMI-panel

CAN OUT

CAN IN

CAN OUT

termination resistor

BASE EXTENSION

EMI-panel EMI-panel

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


160 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 157 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240)

Figure 158 CC-link cables between the racks BS-240 / 240 II

Rack-

type

Cable

no.

From interface

Base Rack

To interface Exten-

sion Rack

Factory

No.:

S30864-*

Cable

length

BS-240 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A2 1975 mm

Ext. 1 CU 4...7 Extension 1 CU 4...7

278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3


Table 58 List of CC-link cables BS-240

Ext. 1 CU 0...3

Ext. 1 CU 4...7

Ext. 2 CU 4...7

Ext. 2 CU 0...3

Ext.1 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 0...3

(Ext.2) CU 0...3

(Ext.2) CU 4...7

CU 4...7

CU 0...3

Base Rack Extension 1 Rack Extension 2 Rack

277

278

CU 4...7

CU 0...3

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 161


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 159 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240XL)

Figure 160 CC-link cables between BS-240XL / 240XL II racks

Rack-

type

Cable

no.

From interface

Base Rack

To interface Exten-

sion Rack

Factory

No.:

S30864-*

Cable

length

BS-240 II 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A38 1920 mm


278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3


Table 59 List of CC-link cables BS-240 II

Ext. 1 CU 8..11

Ext. 1 CU 0...3

Ext. 1 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 0...3

Base Rack Extension 1 Rack

330

Ext.1 CU 8...11

Ext.1 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 0...3

Ext.1 CU 8...11

162161

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


162 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.4.13 CC-link cabling between BS-240 IIB/240XL IIB racks

The signal transfer between the rack is carried out by the cabling as shown in the follow-

ing figures.

Figure 161 CC-link interfaces on the top of Base rack

Figure 162 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks

Rack type Cable

No.

From interface

Base Rack

To interface Exten-

sion Rack

Factory

No.:

S30864-*

Cable

length

BS-240XL 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm

162 Ext.1 CU 4...7 Extension1 CU 4...7


BS-240XL II 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm



Table 60 CC-link cables of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II

Base Extension 1 Extension 2

CU 0-7 CU 8-15 CU 16-23

CU 16-23 red

CU 16-23

CU 8-15 red

CU 8-15

CU 8-15 red

CU 8-15

CU 8-15 red

CU 8-15

optional

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 163


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 163 CC-link cables between BS-240XL IIB racks

g NOTE

Only cables the cable as defined in the table above have to be used for CC-link connec-

tions to avoid transmission troubles!

Cables for link redundancy are optionally.

Cable

No.

from Base rack to Extension 1 or 2 rack Factory

No.:S30864-*

Cable

length

10 CU 8...15 Extension1 CU 8...15 X215-A232 2,83 m

10 CU 16...23 Extension2 CU 16...23

11 CU 8...15 Extension1 CU 8...15 X215-A231 5,83 m

11 CU 16...23 Extension1 CU 16...23

10 CU 8...15 red. Extension1 CU 8...15 red X215-A232 2,83 m

10 CU 16...23 red Extension2 CU 16...23 red

11 CU 8...15 red Extension1 CU 8...15 red X215-A231 5,83 m

11 CU 16...23 red Extension1 CU 16...23 red

Table 61 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks

Base Extension 1

CU 16-23 red

CU 16-23

CU 8-15 red

CU 8-15

optional

CU 16-23 red

CU 16-23

CU 8-15 red

CU 8-15

CU 0-11 CU 12-23

Cable

No.

from Base rack to Extension Factory

No.:S30864-*

Cable

length

12 CU 8...15 CU 8...15 X215-A232 2,83 m

12 CU 16...23 CU 16...23

13 CU 8...15 CU 8...15 X215-A231 5,83 m

13 CU 16...23 CU 16...23

12 CU 8...15 redundancy. CU 8...15 redundancy X215-A232 2,83 m

12 CU 16...23 redundancy CU 16...23 redundancy

Table 62 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


164 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

g NOTE

Only cables the cable as defined in the table above have to be used for CC-link connec-

tions to avoid transmission troubles!

Cables for link redundancy are optionally.

13 CU 8...15 redundancy CU 8...15 redundancy X215-A231 5,83 m

13 CU 16...23 redundancy CU 16...23 redundancy

Cable

No.

from Base rack to Extension Factory

No.:

S30864-*

Cable

length

Table 62 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks (Cont.)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 165


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.5 Inter-rack cabling (mixed configuration)

This chapter provides information about the cable connections between racks, depen-

dent on the rack type and equipping variant (BS-240 / 240XL with BS-240 II / 240XL II).

Inter-rack cables are not pre-installed in the factory and foreseen for setup on site.

The required distances rack rear to wall must be considered. The required minimum dis-

tances for the rack variants are listed in . In case of mixed configuration, the BS-240

racks have be shifted 50 mm away from the wall, to allow the rack interconnection of

both rack types.

g NOTE


2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with

an interconnection hole in the side panels. From this follows, that cable connections

between racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible, if these rack

types will be used.

The -48V DC cable connection between the racks will be routed through the cut-outs at

the side walls of the racks.

The power cables of the BS-240 cabinets are routed behind the DC-Panel cover and the

power cable of the BS-240 II cabinets are routed visible in front of the DC-Panel.

If racks have to be fixed to the floor with earthquake kits, the relevant minimum distance

to the wall is 150 mm.

The covered cut-outs plates at the sides of the rack and the break-out pieces of the top

covers of first and second generation are not corresponding. Therefore the rack inter-

connections for SELIC-, CAN-Bus- and EMC/grounding have to be routed through

removed break-out pieces at the rear of the rack‘s top covers (see Figure 164).

Figure 164 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing

g NOTE

According to the relevant EMC requirements, the top cover of the rack have to be

mounted always!

2. Generation1. Generation

View of rear side

Cover

Cables: e.g. CAN-Bus

SELIC

EMC-cable

Cover

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


166 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.5.1 Battery cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II racks

The battery backup time of already installed BS-240 racks can be extended with addi-

tional battery sets inside of BS-240 II racks. In addition to the battery kits that will used

for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with the AC/DC frames (BS-240) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240 II), cable kits are provided for the

connection of BS-240 II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS-240 Service1

rack.

Figure 165 Example of battery cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service racks

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service2/2

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

Service2/3

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1

F:AC/DC 1

110/1

111/1

168

166

BAT0

110/4M

111/4M

110/3M

111/3M

HU # 5 for LE

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 4 for LE

168

168

182 181

LE-Panel

BAT1

BAT1

1 6 0 A

166

166

110/2

111/2

F:AC/DC 2

110/4M

111/4M

110/2

111/2

to S2/3

from S1

Service2/1 Service1

BS-240 II Rack BS-240 II Rack BS-240 RackBS-240 Rack

111/3M

110/3M

BAT2

BAT2

BAT2

BAT3

BAT3

T0

T1

a

b

a a a

b b b

2625 27 28

+ +- -

BAT 0 BAT 1

F:AC/DC 1

T0

T1

a

b

a a a

b b b

1514 1617

+ +- -

BAT 2 BAT 3

F:AC/DC 2

112/2ϑ

112/1ϑ

112/3ϑ

112/4ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

ϑ

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 167


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

gNOTE

The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum

current rating of 75 Ampere.

If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,

the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:

– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).

– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the

second generation. Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set

of the relevant MK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must

be implemented.

Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color

110/1/M111/1/M

S1/F:AC/DC1-26bS1/F:AC/DC1-25b

S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-)S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+)

S30864-X211-A146

1300 mm blueblack

110/2/M

111/2/M

S1/F:AC/DC1-28b

S1/F:AC/DC1-27b

S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-)

S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+)

S30864-

X211-A147

3300 mm blue

black

110/3/M

111/3/M

S1/F:AC/DC2-15b

S1/F:AC/DC2-14b



S30864-

X211-A148

3700 mm blue

black

110/4/M

111/4/M

S1/F:AC/DC2-17b

S1/F:AC/DC2-16b



S30864-

X211-A149

4600 mm blue

black

Table 63 Battery cable kits for connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 racks

Cable no. from to Factory no. length

112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm

112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm



Table 64 Overview of the tempresistor cables

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


168 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.5.2 Battery cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II racks

The battery backup time of already installed BS-240XL racks can be extended with addi-

tional battery sets inside of BS-240XL II racks. In addition to the battery kits that will used

for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with the AC/DC frames (BS-240XL) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240XL II), cable kits are provided

for the connection of BS-240XL II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS-

240XL Service1 rack.

Figure 166 Example of battery cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1

F:AC/DC 1

110/1

111/1

168

166

110/4M

111/4M

110/3M

111/3M

F:AC/DC 2

110/2

111/2

Service1

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service2/1 RackSIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

Service2/2 Rack

FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

FAN#0 FAN#1

166

168

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

S2/3to

S1from

ϑ ϑϑ

S2/2to

T0

T1

a

b

a a a

b b b

2625 27 28

+ +- -

BAT 0 BAT 1

F:AC/DC 1

T0

T1

a

b

a a a

b b b

1514 16 17

+ +- -

BAT 2 BAT 3

F:AC/DC 2

112/2ϑ

112/1ϑ

112/3ϑ

112/4ϑ

first Generationsecond Generation second Generation

BAT1BAT2 BAT 0

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 169


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

g NOTE

The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum

current rating of 75 Ampere.

If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,

the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:

– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).

– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the

second generation.

Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set of the relevantMK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must be implemented.

Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color

110/1111/1

S1/F:AC/DC1-26bS1/F:AC/DC1-25b

S1 BAT0 (-)S1 BAT0 (+)

S30864-X211- A33

1750 mm blueblack

110/1/M

111/1/M

S1/F:AC/DC1-26b

S1/F:AC/DC1-25b

S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-)

S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+)

S30864-X211-

A133

1750 mm blue

black

110/2/M

111/2/M

S1/F:AC/DC1-28b

S1/F:AC/DC1-27b



S30864-X211-

A134

3300 mm blue

black

110/3/M

111/3/M

S1/F:AC/DC2-15b

S1/F:AC/DC2-14b



S30864-X211-

A135

4200 mm blue

black

110/4/M

111/4/M

S1/F:AC/DC2-17b

S1/F:AC/DC2-16b



S30864-X211-

A136

4700 mm blue

black

Table 65 Battery cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 racks

Cable no. from to Factory no. length

112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm




Table 66 Overview of the tempresistor cables

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


170 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.5.3 Battery cabling activities

Connect the battery sets with the corresponding AC/DC frame as follows

– Connect the wire 110/*/M (blue) at the -48 V terminal and the 111/*/M wire (black)

at the +0 V terminal of the MK:BATTERY. – Tighten the connection with torque wrench SW13 to 15 Nm.

– Attach the cable lug of the tempresistor cable 112/* to the + pole of the battery set.

– Route the wires through the rack interconnection holes the Service1 rack.

– Remove the cover plate of the AC/DC frame.

– Insert the wires into the matching WAGO terminals of AC/DC frame 1 or 2 in accor-

dance with Figure 168.

– Plug in the tempresistor cables at the sockets T 0 and T1 (see Table 64 for BS-240

and Table 66 for BS-240XL).

Figure 167 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M

Figure 168 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC

connection with F:AC/DC

Connection with MK:Battery

precutted

in the factory

BAT 2 BAT3

- + -+

BAT 0 BAT1

- + -+

F:AC/DC 1 F:AC/DC 2

T0

T1

T0

T1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 171


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.5.4 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension

An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second

generation) is shown in Figure 169.

Figure 169 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1

The following rule must be taken into account:

– The DC-breaker ratings of Service1 are limited (50A) for DC power supply the Base

and Extension racks. Therefore only CU configurations can be implemented in Base

and Extension, which DC supply currents not exceed the breaker rating of 50A.

ACTC0V-48V

DC-Panel

Base Extension1

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06

ACTC0V-48V

DC panel

Service1

b b

bbbbbbbb

a a a a a a a a aa a a

aaa

b

b b

b

b

c c c c c

123456789101112131415

DCP:RSHS1

to Base

to Ext.1(to Ext.2)(to Serv.2)

1)

1) Type of cable (16 mm 2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C105 (black)

first Generationsecond Generation

second Generation

1)

C39195-Z70-C66 (blue)

BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05BR06

FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


172 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.5.5 -48V DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension

The Figure 170 shows an example for the -48V power supply connection of a Service1A

rack BS-240 II with Base and Extension BS-240. The Service1A rack is equipped with

the AD-panel ADPA.

g NOTE

If a Service1A supplies a Base (second generation) or an Extension (second genera-

tion) the 80A DC-breakers (AD-panel: BR28, BR29 and BR30) must be replaced by a

50A type! This reduction in power for the affected rack must be considered for configu-

ration planning! Therefore a mounting kit must be ordered with three 50A breakers

(Factory no.: S30864-X215-A126).

Figure 170 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3)

Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.

461 S1A/ADPA/B/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.6 m S30864-X215- A127

S1A/ADPA/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black

462 S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V

S1A/ADPA/E1/ 0V

Extension1/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V

Extension1/DCP inside/ 9b/0V

blue

black

2.2 m S30864-X215-

A128

463 S1A/ADPA/E2/ -48V

S1A/ADPA/E2/ 0V

Extension2/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V

Extension2/DCP inside/ 9b/0V

blue

black

2.8 m S30864-X215-

A129

Table 67 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 173


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

If the Service1A is equipped with an AD-panel ADP-2V1, connect it with the Base- and

Extension racks of the BS-240 as shown in the figure below.

Figure 171 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1)

FAN#0 FAN#1

DCP:LEBREAK

ACTC ACTC

DCP:RSHE

a

b

c

4

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b2357810111213

a

b

c

1

a

b

c

6914

a

a

b

b

c

c

d

a

b

c

4

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b2357810111213

a

b

c

1

a

b

c

6914

a

a

b

b

c

c

d

to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A

-48V -48V0V0V

513 514

513-1513-2

514-1514-2

515-1515-2

AD-Panel ADP-2V1

513 514 515*

515* to Extension2

Service1A Base Extension1second Generation first Generationfirst Generation

DCP:RSHBDCP:RSHB

If the cables 513-515 1/2should be used to connect theBase- and Extension Racks with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel AD PA,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.

Batt

Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.

513 S1A/ADP-2V1/B/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.15 m

1.10 m

S30864-X215-

A192S1A/ADP-2V1/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black

514 S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue

black

1.75 m

1,70 m

S30864-X215-

A193S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V

515 S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2,35 m

2,30 mS1A/ADP-2V1/E2/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black

Table 68 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


174 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.5.6 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2

An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-

tion) is shown in Figure 172.

g NOTE

For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-

tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory.

Figure 172 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

HU # 4 for LE

HU # 5 for LE

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service2/1 Ra ck

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

Service 1

b b

bbbbbbbb

a a a a a a a a aa a a

aaa

b

b b

b

b

c c c c c

123456789101112131415

DCP:RSHS1

to Base

to Ext.1

(to Ext.2)

(toServ.2)

first Generation

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel (S2)

ACTC

Service2/2 Rack

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

FAN#0 FAN#1

second Generationsecond Generation

33/M

33

to Service2/3

Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx

Type of cable (10 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black)

C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)

Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152


C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)

3333/M

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 175


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.5.7 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2

An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)

is shown in Figure 173 (example with AD-panel ADPA).

g NOTE

Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first

generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.

g NOTE

The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must

not exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)

Figure 173 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3)

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Pane

ACTC

- -- + ++ -+

+ -LE

AD Panel180A

BR 33

BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V

X29

FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC

DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2

33/M

402

Service1AService2/1Service2/2

second Generationfirst Generationfirst Generation

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b123456789

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b123456789

0V -48V 0V -48V

to Service2/3 to Service2/2

453

45333/M

33/M33/M

to Service2/1 to Service1A

Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)

Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)

C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)

Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119



Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152



HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

1 6 0 A

HU # 4for LE

HU # 5for LE

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


176 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 174 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service1Asecond Generation

ACTC ACTC

DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2

33/M

first Generationfirst Generation

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b123456789

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b123456789

0V -48V 0V -48V


33/M

33/M33/M


33/M

503

503

Cable No. 503: S30864-X215-A164, length 1.30 mCable No. 33/M: S30864-X215-A152, length 0.90 m

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 177


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.5.8 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension

An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second

generation) is shown in Figure 175.

Figure 175 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1

ACTC0V-48V

DC-Panel

Base Extension1

BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06

ACTC0V-48V

DC panel

Service1

b

b

bbbb

bb

a a

a a aa

aa a a

aaa

b

b b

b

b

c c c c123478910111213

DCP:R12S1

(to Serv.2)

1)

1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)

first Generation second Generationsecond Generation

1)

C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)

BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06

34

35

56

(Component of MK:CARSV1 / S30864-X215-A28)

to Ext.1

to Base

FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


178 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.5.9 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension

The Figure 176 shows an example of the -48V power supply connections between a

Service1A rack and Base / Extension rack (first generation).

Figure 176 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1

b

a

aa a a

b

b b b

c c c

1237891011 45a

b

a

b

c

b

a

6

a

b

b

a a

b

c c

b

a a

b

c c

1213

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

ACTC

- -- + ++ -+

+ -LE

AD Panel180A

BR 33

BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V

X29

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service1A

ACTC ACTC

DCP:R12B DCP:R12E

Extension1Base

to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A

-48V0V

second Generation first Generationfirst Generation

DC-Panel DC-Panel

c

b

a

b

aa a a a

b

b b b

c c c c

1238910111213 56

b

a a

b

c c

4a

b

c

b

a

7

a

b

b

a a

b

c c

b

a a

b

c c

1415

413 414

-48V0V

1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)

C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 179


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.5.10 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2

An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-

tion) is displayed in Figure 177.

g NOTE

For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-

tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory!

Figure 177 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2

HU # 0for LE

HU # 1for LEHU # 2for LEHU # 3for LEHU # 4for LEHU # 5for LE

SIEMENS0V-48V

LEPanel(S2) ACTC

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service2/1 Rack

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

Service1

b b

bbbbbbbb

aaaaaaaa a

a aa

a

aa

b

bb

b

bc c cc c

123456789101112131415

DCP:RSHS1

to Baseto Ext.1(to

Serv.2)

first Generation

SIEMENS0V-48V

LEPanel (S2) ACTC

Service2/2 Rack

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

FAN#0 FAN#1

second Generationsecond Generation

33/M

33

to Service2/3

Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx


C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)

Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)


3333/M

HU # 0for LEHU # 1for LEHU # 2for LEHU # 3for LEHU # 4for LEHU # 5for LE

FAN#0 FAN#1

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


180 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.5.11 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2

An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)

is shown in Figure 178.

g NOTE

Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first

generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.

g NOTE

The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must

not exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)

Figure 178 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2

SIEMENS

0V -48V

LE Panel

HU # 0 for LE

HU # 1 for LE

HU # 2 for LE

HU # 3 for LE

ACTC

- -- + ++ -+

+ -LE

AD Panel180A

BR 33

BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V

X29

1 6 0 A

1 6 0 A

FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC

DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2

33/M

402

Service1AService2/1Service2/2

second Generationfirst Generationfirst Generation

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b123456789

aa a

aa

b

b b

b

b

c c cccc c

b

aaa a

bb b123456789

0V -48V 0V -48V


453

45333/M

33/M33/M


Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)

Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)

C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)

Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119



Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152



33/M

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 181


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.5.12 SELIC-cabling between the racks (mixed configuration)

In case of extension of an existing Base Station system with additional Extension racks

the following combinations are possible:

– BS-240 Base -> BS-240 II Extension

– BS-240 Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension

– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240 Extension

– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension

– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 Extension

– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 II Extension

The necessary cables for extension combinations have to be ordered additionally (see

Table 69 and Table 70). For mixed configuration with distance between the racks (Table

70) the cable sets include an appropriate CAN-Bus cable.

Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*

BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /

240XL II Ext.

BS-240 Base cable length see standard

configuration

1920 mm 1460 mm

S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A27

BS-240 II Base cable length 1920 mm see standard

configuration

1460 mm

S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A69

BS-240XL /

240XL II Base

cable length 1460 mm 1460 mm see standard

configurationS30864-* X210-A74 X210-A75

Table 69 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets)

Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*

BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /

240XL II Ext.

BS-240 Base cable length 4120 mm or

6970 mm

4070 mm or

6920 mm

3612 mm or

6462 mm

S30864-* X211-A123 or

A118

X211-A132 or

A133

X211-A125 or

A120

BS-240 II Base cable length 4070 mm or

6920 mm

4070 mm or

6920 mm

3612 mm or

6462 mm

S30864-* X211-A132 or

A133

X211-A126 or

A121

X211-A134 or

A135

BS-240XL /

240XL II Base

cable length 3612 mm or

6462 mm

3612 mm or

6462 mm

3114 mm or

5960 mm

S30864-* X211-A136 or

A137

X211-A138 or

A139

X211-A122 or

A116

Table 70 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


182 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.6 Combination of racks with different heights

4.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension

A BS-240XL II Extension rack can be added to an existing BS-240 II Base rack to

increase BTS capacity.

Figure 179 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension)

Use the following pre-fabricated cables for connection of the racks:

– Cable 414: DC cable pair (25 mm2) with braided shield, copper wires 0.15 mm,

tinned, C39195-Z70-C158 (BK Type S07V-C4V5-K)

– Cable 446: Grounding cable (16 mm2), C39195-Z70-C105 (BK Type S07V-K)

The outer insulation of both DC-cables that to be routed through the cable feeding

module of the Service1A rack has to be removed at the EMC-gasket (see Figure 180).

This measure guarantees a proper contact between the cable screen and the mesh

screened rubber profiles.

0V-48VLEPanel

HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE

ACTC

--- +++ -+

+ -LE ADPanel 180 ABR33

B E1E2B E1E2 10-48VX29

1 6 0 A

FAN#0 FAN#1

Service1A

HU # 4for LEHU # 5for LE

ACTC0V-48V

Base

BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06

Extension1

BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06

ACTC0V-48VDCpanel

FAN0 FAN1

FAN0 FAN1

MSU:DCcable duct

cable ties

screening measuresee view A

screening measuresee view B

BS-240 II BS-240 II BS-240XL II

414

413

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 183


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 180 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module

Route the DC-cables to the rear side of the Extension rack in a suitable cable duct.

Remove the insolation of the cables approximately 15 mm for contact of the screen to

the stress relieving clamp at the right edge of rack (Figure 181). Connect the cables 414-

1 and 414-2 to the terminal block of the MSU:DC.

Figure 181 (View B) Cable connections to ground and MSU:DC of Extension

The connection between the racks will be completed by the routing of the common

ground cable no. 446. The cable is equipped with cable lugs at both ends and will be

attached to the M8 ground bolts at the rear side of the EMI panel.

For SELIC cabling refer to the chapter 4.5.12.

For CAN-Bus cabling refer to the chapter 4.4.10.

4.7 Combination of racks with a gap between the racks

4.7.1 BS-240XLU II, Service1A / Extension with BS-240XLU IIB, Base

The racks can be installed with a gap between the racks as shown in the following figure.

1 5 m m

-48V +0V

EMC - bar

414

cable ties

stress - relieving

to MSU:DC

DC -cables from Service1A rack

screen connection

from Service1A rack

common ground cable446

414-1414-2

-48V+0V

rear side of rack

grounding bolts

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


184 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 182 Combination of BS-240XLU II with BS-240 XLU IIB racks

Before starting the installation, pay attention to the following rules:

• The racks of the B-version (in this case the Base rack) do not provide an opening in

the side panel for the DC cables to the Service 1A rack.

• The unused opening in the side wall of the BS-240 XLU II Extension rack has to be

closed with it‘s cover plate.

• Use cables with braided shield only.

• Route all cables from the Base rack to the Service 1A / Extension rack inside a cable

duct.

• Store the extra length of pre-fabricated cables in the cable duct.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 185


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 183 Cable connections between BS-240 XLU II and BS-240 XLU IIB racks

Further informations are provided in the section “Combination of racks with different

heights”.

Select the CC-link cables dependend on the required length and connect them accord-

ing the following tables:

Cable

no.

Code-no. from

Base B-version

to

Extension A-version

length

600 S30864-

X215-A235

CU12...15, connector C CU12...15, connector B

connector A, not conn.

3,20 m

CU12...15 redundancy

connector D

CU12...15, connector B


600 S30864-

X215-A235

CU16...23, connector C CU16...19, connector A



connector D

CU16...19, connector A


Table 71 CC-cables l=3,20 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


186 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

The figure below shows the CC-link connections between the racks. Note, that connec-

tors “D” of the Base rack will remain unplugged, if no link redundancy is required.

Figure 184 CC-link connections BS-240XLU II Ext. / BS-240XLU IIB Base rack

Install the CAN-Bus connections between racks as described in section “4.4.10 CAN-

bus connections. The following cables are provided:

Cable

no.

Code-no. from

Base B-version

to

Extension A-version

length

601 S30864-

X215-A236

CU12...15, connector C CU12...15, connector B


6,10 m


connector D



601 S30864-

X215-A236

CU16...23, connector C CU16...19, connector A



connector D

CU16...19, connector A


Table 72 CC-cables l=6,10 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks)

Code no. Cable length

S30864-X210-A12 1,90 m

S30864-X210-A14 3,30 m

Table 73 Overview of Can-Bus cables

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 187


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

The DC cables from the Service1A rack to the Base and Extension rack have to be

prepared on site. For the selection of the cable type and the several installation steps,refer to section 4.6.1.

S30864-X210-A66 12,00 m

S30864-X210-A11 1,20 m

S30864-X210-A13 2,60 m

S30864-X210-A15 4,00 m

S30864-X210-A60 6,80 m

S30864-X210-A61 7,80 m

S30864-X210-A63 5,00 m

Code no. Cable length

Table 73 Overview of Can-Bus cables (Cont.)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


188 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.8 Installation of link equipment

The link equipment acts as a front end, to provide the Abis interface. Different equipment

can be used for wire or radio transmission. Which equipment will be used depends on

customer requirements.

The number of link equipment, that can be installed depends on the height of the units.

g NOTE

For connections between Abis interface in the Base rack and link equipment in the

Service rack, pay attention to the recommendation CCITT G.703.

The receive level compared with the transmit level should not be lower than 6 dB.

For the installation of link equipment, the mounting kit MK:LE is needed always and

designed for 19” units. The MK:LE will fixed at the mounting bars on the right and left

side of the rack. 4 screws Torx T30 are needed for fixing.

The MK:LE holds the customer-dependent frames for microwave equipment or the

frame for 2 NTPM, F:NT (german market only).

The installation of link equipment in the mounting kit has always to start at the top of the

mounting kit below the DC-panel without a gap, so that the airflow inside the rack will

not be affected.

Figure 185 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE

MK:LE

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 189


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.8.1 Installation of microwave equipment

In case of microwave transmission, the indoor units inside the Service rack have to be

connected via the microwave antenna cables with the tower mounted outdoor units.

g NOTE

The outer insulation of the microwave antenna cables has to be removed in the area of

the cable feeding module for proper ground contact to the metal lids.

Connect the microwave antenna cables at the indoor units as follows:

1. Remove the front part of cable feeding module.

2. Feed the microwave cables through the cable feeding module forward to the front

connectors of microwave indoor units.

3. Fix the microwave cables at the front connectors of the indoor units. The connector

type and fixing torque depends on the equipment, provided by the customer.

4.

Bend the microwave cables into the a position that it is able to close the cablefeeding module without any pressure and tension.

5. Fix removable part in its original position.

6. Fix each cable at the strain reliefs of the feeding module with cable ties.

The next step is the connection of the microwave indoor units with the -48 VDC circuit of

the Service rack and the alarm lines at the spring terminals of the ACTC. Because con-

struction differences between the BS-240 and the BS-240 II rack, proceed in different

ways. In case of BS-240 Service racks perform the following steps:

1. Connect the microwave power supply / alarm cables (S30864-X211-A57) at the front

connectors of ACTC (see the following figure).

2. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the right subrack

mounting bar with cable ties.3. Attach equipment-specific connectors at the cable ends that should be connected to

the microwave units.

Figure 186 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL)

AL15_P µWave (white)

AL15_P AL_GND (black)

DC_µWave... PUE +0 V (red)

DC_µWave... MUE -48 V (blue)

microwave connector sup to 9 cablesS30864-K2045-X-*-7483

frame for link equipment

Service rack

1 2 3

4 5 6

97 8

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


190 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Install the DC-supply wires in case of the BS-240 II Service1A rack as follows:

1. Remove the cover plate of the DC-distribution block at the DC-panel.

2. Fit the breakers for link equipment (can be 4A breaker, V39118-Z4005-A91 or 10A,

V39118-Z4005-A91). The number of breakers depends on the volume of microwaveunits, that should be installed.

3. Connect the blue/black twisted wire pairs (cable no. 401, S30864-X215-A39) at the

2-pole connectors X25F (R)- X32F (R) of the DC-distribution block.

4. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the left subrack

mounting bar with cable ties.

5. Attach the equipment-specific connector at the cable ends, that should be con-

nected at the DC-input of the microwave units.

Figure 187 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401)

Install the alarm line connection between the microwave units and the ACTC:

1. Measure the distance between the alarm output of the microwave units and theterminal block of the ACTC module in the F:ACTC-2V1.

2. Cut stranded wires with a cross section in the range of 0,08 mm2 - 0,5 mm2 (e.g.

LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 blue/black) to the required length.

3. Remove 10 mm of the insulation and attach the wires to the matching spring termi-

nals of the ACTC.

4. Route the wires down to the microwave units and fix the bundle at the right subrack

mounting bar with cable ties.

5. If necessary, equip the stranded wires with a connector. The type depends on the

alarm interface of the microwave units.

The installation steps of the DC-supply and alarm cables for the microwave units in the

BS-240 II Service2 racks are equal to the Service 1A rack. In this case, the ACTCmodule is part of the DC-panel and located on the right of the link equipment breakers.

In the DC-panels of the Service2 rack, the link equipment breakers BR01- BR06 (con-

nectors X25F (R) - X30F (R) can be used for the protection of the microwave units.

The following graphics should illustrate the DC cabling in both rack types.

remove the cover plate

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 191


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 188 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II)

Figure 189 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II)

The next step is the routing of the PCM-lines between the OVPT / ABISCON in the Base

rack and the PCM interfaces of the microwave indoor units. Therefore the pre-fabricated

cable S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 should be used. The cable is used as a splitter.

It consists of four single cables with Sub D-9 female connectors for the connection of a

microwave unit at each connector. The cables are attached to a common Sub D-25

female connector. The cable will be expanded with cable S30864-X211-A112 for the

connection with the OVPT / ABISCON.

BR01

4A or10A

BR02

4A or10A

BR06

4A or10A

BR05

4A or10A

BR03

4A or10A

BR04

4A or10A

BR07

4A or10A

BR08

4A or10A

-48 V

+0 V

X 2 5 R

X 2 5 F

X 3 0 R

X 3 0 F

X 2 9 R

X 2 9 F

X 3 2 R

X 3 2 F

X 3 1 R

X 3 1 F

X 2 7 R

X 2 7 F

X 2 8 R

X 2 8 F

X 2 6 R

X 2 6 F

m W

a v e 3

m W

a v e 2

m W

a v e 1

m W

a v e 0

m W

a v e 4

m W

a v e 7

m W

a v e 6

m W

a v e 5

m W a v e

9

m W a v e 1 1

m W a v e 1 0

m W a v e 8

example for 2 microwave units per breaker example for 1 microwave unit per breaker

cables no. 401cables no. 401

BR01

4A or10A

BR02

4A or10A

BR06

4A or10A

BR05

4A or10A

BR03

4A or10A

BR04

4A or10A

BR07

4A or10A

BR08

4A or10A

-48 V

+0 V

X 2 5 R

X 2 5 F

X 3 0 R

X 3 0 F

X 2 9 R

X 2 9 F

X 3 2 R

X 3 2 F

X 3 1 R

X 3 1 F

X 2 7 R

X 2 7 F

X 2 8 R

X 2 8 F

X 2 6 R

X 2 6 F

m W a v e 3

m W a v e 2

m W a v e 1

m W a v e 0

m W a v e 4

m W a v e 1 1

m W a v e 1 0

m W a v e 5

m W a v e 7

m W a v e 9

m W a v e 8

m W a v e 6

cables no. 401

A C T C , F A N

A C T C , D C I N

cable no. 408 407

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


192 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

An overview about the complete microwave cabling of both rack designs is given in the

following figure.

Signal Name Plug Sub D9 f Pin

No.

Plug Sub D25 Pin

No.

OVPT Terminal

Pin No.

cable no. S30864-X207-A8-*-7402

cable no. S30864-X211-A112

PCM 1 - ULA 1 1 22

PCM 1 - ULB 6 14 20

GND/G 3 3 18

PCM 1 - DLA 5 2 21

PCM 1 - DLB 9 15 19

GND/G --- --- 23

PCM 2 - ULA 1 4 16PCM 2 - ULB 6 16 14

GND/G 3 18 18

PCM 2 - DLA 5 5 15

PCM 2 - DLB 9 17 13

GND/G --- --- 17

PCM 3 - ULA 1 6 10

PCM 3 - ULB 6 19 8

GND/G 3 8 12

PCM 3 - DLA 5 7 9

PCM 3 - DLB 9 20 7

GND/G --- --- 11

PCM 4 - ULA 1 9 4

PCM 4 - ULB 6 21 2

GND/G 3 23 6

PCM 4 - DLA 5 10 3

PCM 4 - DLB 9 22 1

GND/G --- --- 5

GND/G --- --- 28

Table 74 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 193


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 190 Overview of microwave cabling

4.8.2 Installation of NTPM

In case of transmission via terrestrial lines, the NTPMs are placed inside the Service

rack, that is equipped with a mounting kit for NTPM, called frame F:NT.

gNOTE

It is necessary, to install a mounting kit MK:LE before mounting of the F:NT.

Each frame F:NT provides the equivalent space of 3 HU, allowing the installation of up

to 2 NTPM side by side.

The frame F:NT provides 3 interfaces:

– SubD 9, male with M3 fixings for -48 V output

– SubD 25, female with M3 fixings for PCM input

– SubD 25, male with M3 fixings for PCM output

PCM0

PCM1

LE1-4

LE5-8

ACTC

-48 Vdc supply and

Base Rack

to ODU

F:CORE

OVPT

Service Rack

SubD 9

Sub D 9

Sub D 25

Sub D 25

f

f

f

f m

m

m

m

PCM0PCM1

LE1-4

LE5-8

ACTC

Base Rack

to ODU

EMI panel

F:CORE

OVPT

Service Rack

rack front

Sub D 25

f

f

f

f

m

m

m

m

DC panel

alarm lines

twisted pair

breaker panel

top view

BS-240 II / 240XL II BS-240 / 240XL

EMI panel

top view

rack front

alarm lines

1)1)

1) integral part of cabinet cabling2)

3)4)

2)2)

has to be prepared on site

pair of stranded wires, e.g. C39195-Z75-C510 (Type: LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 BL/SW VS)can be ordered as prepared cable (Octopus cable), order-no.: S30864-X207-A8-*-7402

can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X215-A39, (twisted pair, blue: -48 Vdc, black: 0 Vdc)5)

3)

4)

4)

4)

4)

can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30861-K2045-X-*-7483, (power cable for microwave module)6)

6)

7) 7)

7) can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X211-A112

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


194 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

In case of the BS-240, the power supply cable from the frame F:NT to the ACTC is part

of the F:NT. For the BS-240 II Service1A / Service2 racks use the DC power cable

S30864-X216-A109 for the connections between the link equipment breakers (4A) and

the -48VDC input of the F:NT.

For the PCM connection between the OVPT/ABISCON and the F:NT the pre-fabricated

cable S30864-X211-A59 should be used. An overview of the cabling if the F:NT is

installed inside the racks is given in the following figure.

Figure 191 Overview of NTPM cabling variants

PCM0PCM1

ACTC

-48 V

Service Rack Base Rack

OVPT

PCM lines

EMI panel

F:NT1

F:NT2

F:CORE

rack front

BS-240 / 240XLBS-240 II / 240XL II

PCM0PCM1

ACTC

Service Rack Base Rack

OVPT

EMI panel

F:NT1

F:NT2

F:CORE

rack front

PCM lines

DC panel

1) Integral part of cabinet cabling2) has to be prepared on site

3) power supply cable: S30864-X216-A109

4) cable S30864-X211-A59

5)

1)1)

2)2)

3)-48Vdcsupply lines

4)4)

5)5)

2)

OVPT

PCM0 PCM1OVPT

PCM1PCM06) 6)

see Figure: Interface on frame F:NT

6) maximum of four PCM links per OVPT

7) 2 PCM links per F:NT if fully equipped with 2 modules

7)7)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 195


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 192 Interfaces on frame F:NT

Name F:NT -48 V, subD 9 female pin

0 V 1,2,6

-48 V 4,5,9

Table 75 Pin assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT

Signal name F:NT PCM-INPUT subD 25

female pin

F:NT PCM-OUTPUT subD 25

male pin

PCM 1 - ULA 1 1

PCM 1 - ULB 14 14

GND/G 3 3

PCM 1 - DLA 2 2

PCM 1 - DLB 15 15

GND/G 16 16

PCM 2 - ULA 4 4

PCM 2 - ULB 17 17

GND/G 6 6

PCM 2 - DLA 5 5

PCM 2 - DLB 18 18

GND/G 19 19

Table 76 Pin assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT

to OVPT / ABISCON

external PCM lines

- 48 VDC

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


196 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.9 Installation of modules and cover parts

For later extension or maintenance it is useful to have a basic knowledge about the

correct removal and replacement of the Core- and RF modules. Two variants for the

fixing of the modules in the subracks does exist. A lever mechanism will be used forfixing of the Core modules COBA and COSA. Fixing screws at the upper and lower edge

are used for securing of the RF modules.The handling is shown in the figure below.

Figure 193 Fixing variants of the modules

Figure 194 Handling of the lever mechanism

To prevent the installation of the plug-in modules at incorrect mounting positions, each

relevant modules provide code keys.

Module Code Key

DUAMCO 7FICOM 7

DIAMCO 8

CU 6

COBA 1

COSA 2

Table 77 Module HW code key

lever mechanism fixing screw

push together

lever mechanism in open position

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 197


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 195 Location of the code key no.

Pay attention to the following hints:

– After removal of a module check the proper condition of the code key plugs on the

backplane.

– Before a module will be plugged-in check the correct setting of the code key number,

this is to prevent damages at the backplane connectors.

– Insert the modules without any pressure.

All empty slots of a sub-rack have to be closed by cover parts, so that the proper air flow

inside the rack is guaranteed. Cover parts with different outer dimensions are provided.

The following table gives information about the relations between modules and cover

parts.

code number article name width applicable for:

S30861-K2019-X CP:CUV1 90 mm CU slots version 1

S30861-K2247-X CP:CUV2 90 mm CU slots version 2

S30861-K2020-X CP:DIAMCOV1 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 1

S30861-K2248-X CP:DIAMCOV2 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 2

S30861-K2021-X CP:ACOMV1 120 mm ACOM slots version 1

S30861-K2249-X CP:ACOMV2 120 mm ACOM slots version 2

S30861-K2022-X CP:COBA/COSAV1 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 1

S30861-K2250-X CP:COBA/COSAV2 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 2

S30861-K2376-X CP:90MMV1 90 mm CU slots, with CP:30MMV1

together for ACOM slots

S30861-K2378-X CP:30MMV1 30 mm for core slots, HYBRID6 con-

figurations and together with

CP:90MMV1 for ACOM slots

Table 78 Relations between cover parts and modules

2

code key no.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


198 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

S30861-K2379-X CP:24MMV1 *) 24 mm front panel for

MFDUAMCO_VX if

HYBRID4 module is notinstalled

*) CP:24MMV1consists of part C50117-A200-C841, delivered without 2D-label

code number article name width applicable for:

Table 78 Relations between cover parts and modules (Cont.)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 199


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.10 Nonstandard installation works

4.10.1 Installation of the AC/DC frame

If an already installed BS-240 should be extended with Service2 racks to provide a

longer battery backup time, the installation of a second AC/DC frame inside the Service1

rack can be necessary.

The AC/DC frame consist of the parts as shown in the figure below.

Complete the air duct first, but do not mount the duct before insert the fan unit connec-

tors into the fitting holes at the rear of the AC/DC frame.

Figure 196 Components of the AC/DC frame

Complete the air duct as displayed in Figure 197 and in Figure 198 steps as follows:

– Insert both air flaps into the air duct frame, so that the flaps will be opened by the air

outlet stream.

– Cover the air duct edges with the 4 rubber sealings.

Figure 197 Fitting of the air flaps

AC/DC frame

air duct

air flaps

front cover

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


200 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

Figure 198 Setup of the rubber sealing

Mount the AC/DC frame inside the Service1 rack as follows:

– Setup the AC/DC frame in the position as shown in the figure below onto the battery

tray.

– Open the cable ring in the upper rear of the rack and select the fan cables no. 51

and no. 52.

– Insert the cable connectors into the fitting holes, so that the connectors can be easy

moved inside the hole.

– Pay attention to the correct cable no. because the connectors can not pulled out

without any damages.

Figure 199 Plug-in of the fan cables

Install the connections between AC/DC frame 1 and 2:

– Mount the prepared air duct at the rear of the AC/DC frame with both screws

provided with the air duct parts (see Figure 200).

– Disconnect cable 91 from the CAN-OUT connector at the backplane of the AC/DC

frame 1 (see Figure 200) and pull down the cable to AC/DC frame 2.

– Plug-in cable no. 89 at the CAN-OUT connector of AC/DC frame 1. The cable isprovided with AC/DC frame 2.

51 52

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 201


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 200 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91

Figure 201 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable

– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in

Figure 201.

– Plug-in the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at connector CAN-OUT of the AC/DC frame 1.

– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in

Figure 201 at AC/DC frame 2.

– Connect the cables no. 91 and 114 as shown in Figure 202.

Figure 202 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2

disconnect cable no. 91

screw

AC/DC frame 1

114

114

AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2

89

89

91

114


8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


202 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

– Connect the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at the CAN-IN connector of the AC/DC frame 2.

– Lift up the AC/DC frame to its mounting position (without gap below AC/DC frame 1).

– Fix the frame with 4 screws Torx T30.

Install the -48 V DC-connections to the DC-Panel of the Service1 rack and connectbattery systems BAT2 and BAT3.

– Connect the cables no. 107 and 108 at the DC clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2.

– Connect the cables no. 110/3 and 111/3 (BAT2), 110/4 and 111/4 (BAT3) at the DC

clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2 if BS-240 Service2 are used.

In case of BS-240 II Service2 racks the cables no. 110/3M and 111/3M (BAT2),

110/4M and 111/4M (BAT3) have to be connect (see figure below).

Figure 203 Connection of DC and battery cables

– Route the cable no. 229 (twisted pair wires, black / blue) from the AC/DC frame 2 tothe ACTC of the Service1 rack.

– Remove the jumper at the BB1connector of the ACTC and insert the plug of the

cable no. 229.

Figure 204 Routing of the battery breaker cable

Complete the installation of the AC/DC frame 2:

– Plug in both fan units. Push down the lids (see Figure 205) during the fitting.

– Fix the cover plates of the AC/DC frames 1 and 2.

108/A

108/B

107/A107/B 107/A

107/B108/A

108/B

110/3M

111/3M110/4M

111/4M


229

remove jumper

229

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 203


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Figure 205 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame

4.10.2 Battery-upgrade of BS-240 Service racksThe mechanical and electrical preparation of the BS-240 Service Racks with AC/DC

systems from the supplier “Lambda”, is the precondition to integrate BS-240 II batteries.

The batterie-upgrade requires the following parts:

• Mounting kit S30861-K2350-X MK:TRAYV1 (cables, mounting guideline)

• Frame F:Battery Tray S30861-B4076-X

• Mounting kit MK:BATTFIXCBFVx S30861-K4258-X (battery fitting, breaker)

The following installation scenarios may be possible:

• Connection of a BS-240 II battery set to an unused battery string of a BS-240

“Lambda”-AC/DC system with frames F:AC/DC1 or F:AC/DC2, 50A battery main

breaker in a BS-240. • Connection of a BS-240 II battery set to an existing BS-240 or BS-240 II battery set,

in order to expand the battery capacity.

f WARNING!

Before starting the battery-upgrading procedure, the relevant battery string must be sep-

arated fro mthe DC_supply by switching OFF the relevant 50ADC breaker of the

Service1 rack.

A minimum distance of 20 mm between DC- and signal lines and single insulated AC-

lines is mandatory.

During the installations works, follow the instructions of the mounting guideline S30861-

K2350-X-*-7428, provided with the installation material.

4.11 Setup of system cabling

The system cabling consists of connections are installed on the front of the rack. Cabling

configurations depend on the different equipping variants (e.g., type of combining,

capacity stage) and the cell configuration of the site.

The system cabling is already installed in the factory. This section provides information

for setup additional system cables for extension of RF modules or the cell configuration

must be changed.

press

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


204 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

System cables will be shipped in a box to avoid twisting and damage. Before starting the

connection procedure, refer to the site documentation and determine the types and

number of cables.

The list of variant numbers (content of the site specific documentation) is needed for thecorrect setup of the cabling between the modules.

g NOTE

For further informations refer to “Configuration Rules for System Cabling”.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 205


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.11.1 System cabling with semi-rigid cables

g NOTE

A minimum bending radius of 10 mm (semi-rigid.141 AI) and 3,5 mm (semi-rigid .86 AI)

must be ensured.

Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and at

SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm.

Terminate all unused connectors of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!

Figure 206 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable

The following table provides an overview of the types and functionality of the prefabri-

cated cables.

connection code number length Path connector cable type

DUAMCO 0/3-

CU 0/1,4/5

C39195-Z80-

C113

1600

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

DUAMCO 1/2-

CU 2/3,6/7

C39195-Z80-

C118

1250

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

DUAMCO 0/3-

CU 0/1,4/5

C39195-Z80-

C160

1250

mm

TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

DUAMCO 1/2-

CU 2/3,6/7

C39195-Z80-

C114

1050

mm

TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

FICOM-0/3

CU 0/1,4/5

C39195-Z80-

C160

1250

mm

TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

FICOM-1/2

CU 2/3,6/7

C39195-Z80-

C114

1050

mm

TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

DIAMCO-0

CU 1,2/3,4/6,7

C39195-Z80-

C116

600

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

DIAMCO-0/1

CU 0/5

C39195-Z80-

C117

750

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

Table 79 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


206 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

g NOTE

In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a short

semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors

(N-type, female) of the modules. Fix the cable at the N-type connectors and screw the

connection to a “fingertight” torque (approx. 1,00 Nm). Avoid the twisting of the cable

connectors during the connection.

DIAMCO-1

CU 2/3,4,6/7

C39195-Z80-

C116

600

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

HPDU (Rack)-

DIAMCO

C39195-Z80-

C174

1250

mm

RX SMA,90°,male/

N-Con,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

HPDU-

FICOM (Rack)

C39195-Z80-

C173

400

mm

TX 7/16,90°,male/

7/16,90°,male

1/2” jum-per

cable

DIAMCO (Rack

0)

DIAMCO (Rack

1)

C39195-Z80-

C176

2700

mm

Cas-

cad

SMA,90°,male/

N-Con,90°,male

Coax flexible

BIAS-T -

DIAMCO

C39195-Z80-

C181

1450

mm

RX SMA,90°,male/

N-Con,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

BIAS-T - HPDU C39195-Z80-

C180

410

mm

RX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al


DUAMCO 0/3- CU

0/1/6/7

C39195-Z80-

C206

1800

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

DUAMCO 0/1/2/3

CU 2/3/8/9

C39195-Z80-

C113

1600

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-

CU 4/5/10/11

C39195-Z80-

C118

1350

mm

RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male

semi-rigid

.086 Al

DUAMCO 0/3- CU

0/1/6/7

C39195-Z80-

C204

1650

mm

TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-

CU 2/3/8/9

C39195-Z80-

C160

1250

mm

TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-

CU 4/5/10/11

C39195-Z80-

C114

1050

mm

TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male

semi-rigid

.141 Al

Table 80 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II


Table 79 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II (Cont.)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 207


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

4.11.2 System Cabling with flexi-cables

g NOTE

Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and at

SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm. Terminate all unused connectors

of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!

The cables have to be routed in such a way that allows the ease exchange of modules

(CUs, Combiners and FANs). For this reason BTS Base-/Extension cabinets which have

been equipped with flexible HF cabling in the factory always, come with a pair of cable-

retainers fitted left-and right hand side at the bottom of each sub-rack (exception: lowest

subrack of a cabinet).

Route the cables, so that the LED-indications of the modules are visible and the test

adapter connectors are accessible.

The task of these cable retainers - which are bended sheet metal parts - is to keep those

flexible HF-cables in a neat position which inter-connect subracks.If a customer decides

to retrofit an 1th generation base station - which has not been equipped with cable-

retainers -with flexible HF cables, these cables must be loosely fitted with cable-ties.

g NOTE

Attention: Fitting of HF cables with cable-ties is not allowed for base stations equipped

with these cable retainers.

Figure 207 Example of system cabling with flexible cables

g NOTE

The minimum single bending radius of the flexible cables is 20 mm. The minimum

repeated bending radius is 40 mm. The exceptional length of the cables have to be

stored inside the vertical space between the subracks and the rack. The horizontal

space below each subrack have not to be used to store the extra length of the system

cables or anything else. This space is used as an air inlet for cooling.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


208 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

g NOTE

If a CU will be replaced by a FlexCU, EDGE-CU or GCU, make sure that the system

cables are installed as listed in the following table.

connection code number length Path connector

ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A14 1800 mm RX SMC,90°,female/

SMC,90°,female


SMC,90°,female


SMC,90°,female

ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A26 600 mm RX SMC,90°,male/

SMC,90°,male


SMC,90°,male


SMC,90°,male


SMC,90°,male


SMC,90°,male

ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A39 390 mm TX SMA,90°,male/

SMA,90°,male


SMA,90°,male


SMA,90°,male


SMA,90°,male


SMA,90°,male

ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A52 1400 mm TX SMA,90°,male/SMA,90°,male


SMA,90°,male


SMA,90°,male

Table 81 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, system cables ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 209


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

g NOTE

In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a short

semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors

(N-type, female) of the modules. N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight".

There doesn't appear to be a consensus on how much torque this is in detail. Connector

suppliers recommends a torque of approx. 1,00 Nm. Avoid the twisting of the cable con-

nectors during the connection.

4.11.3 Terminators

It is necessary to terminate all unused RF-connectors of the RF-modules with 50 Ohm

load resistors.The following resistors are used:

– C39195-Z80-C30 for SMA connectors

– C39195-Z80-C31 for SMC connectors

Fix the terminators at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set 1.00 Nm and at SMC

connectors with a torque wrench set 0.35 Nm. Later removal of terminators must done

with extreme care, to avoid damages at the RF front connectors of the modules.

g NOTE

DUAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-

nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all

unused RX# connectors with a 50 Ohm SMC load resistor and RXCA# connectors with

a 50 Ohm SMA load resistor. In normal operation all open TX# inputs need not to be

terminated.

DIAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-

nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all

unused RX# connectors and RXCA# connectors with a 50 Ohm load resistors.

FICOM: In normal operation all open TX connectors need not to be terminated. An open

expansion connector RF EXP has to be terminated with the terminator delivered with the

FICOM base module.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


210 DN0932994


Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Rack completion

4.12 Post installation notes

4.12.1 Leaving the site

The following instructions must carried before leaving the site:

– At the end of the working day enable any alarms that should be active.

– Contact the Network Control Center to announce your departure.

– Close and lock the rack doors.

– Ensure the site is secure or hand over to the person in charge / caretaker

g NOTE

If the AC-supplied BTS will be not switched ON after the finished installation and is in

non-operational state disconnected from power supply, the BTS-internal battery system

must be disconnected by switching OFF the common battery circuit breaker BR33

(located at the AD-panel of Service1 cabinet).

In case that the BTS is remotely disconnected from the external power supply, all its AC

circuit breakers must be switched OFF to deenergize the system reliably.

If all installation activities are finished, any garbage must be cleared from site. Remove

all packing material for later recycling.

f WARNING!

The burning of rubbish should be avoided, as a burning of packaging material may give

off toxic gases.

g NOTE

For dehydrating the rack during transportation and storage, a bag filled with Silica Gel

is fitted into the rack by the factory. It is recommended to remove the bag, because after

a certain time the bag lost his function.

4.12.2 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment

The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help prevent

potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. It is a precon-

dition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.

For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please contact your

sales representative.

The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is installed in thecountries of the European Union and is covered by the directive 2002/96/EC.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 211


Rack completion

Id:0900d8058088d65c

Confidential

Countries outside the European Union may have other regulations regarding the

disposal of electrical and electronic equipment.

All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the

municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the governmentor the local authorities.

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


212 DN0932994


Id:0900d805805b0be3

Confidential

Appendix

5 Appendix

5.1 Installation toolsThe following tools are necessary to install the base stations:

– Standard toolkit for BSS-installation H89999-B633

– Tool set for BS-24x installation H89999-B148

– ESD safety tool set H89999-B635-V1

– Spirit level

– Tape measure

– Scissors

– Plate shears

– Screw driver for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm

– Torque wrench for SMA connectors 0.74 ft Ib (1.0 Nm), SMC connectors 0.25 ft Ib(0.35 Nm)

– Torque wrench 32 mm (12...35 Nm) for 7/16” connector mounting

– Insulated hexagonal socket screw key or ratchet (M6)

– Isolated torque wrench for Torx T30 (6 Nm) and open ended 17 mm (20 Nm) for

battery mounting

– screwdriver for torx screws T8, T10, T15, T20, T25, T30, T40, T50 (length 200 mm)

– Long screwdriver for torx screws T30 (length 400 mm)

– Engineer‘s wrenches for M12, M42 (SW 19, 65 mm)

– Ratchet with insets for nuts M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16 (7, 8, 10, 13, 17, 19,

24 mm)

– Torx screw drivers for security screw (with pin) T10, T25

– Screwdrivers for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm

– Screwdriver for slotted screw M3, M4, M5

– Screwdriver for pozi drive screws M2, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8

– Stripping knife for 1/2” RF cables

– Trimming tool for 1/2” coaxial cables

– Flat brush, 20 mm width

– Hot air gun or butane torch

– Crimping tool (Hoffmann Order Nr.: 72942 Gr. 35 or Tyco AMP Order Nr.:734650-1)

– 90° offset screw driver for torx screws T20

– Adjuster feed wrench M42 (SW65)

– Flat spanner SW19, SW50

– Hammer drill with twisted drills widia, diameter 8 mm, 18 mm (for fixing of earth-

quake mounting kit only)

– Fall protection equipment for working in dangerous heights (e.g. TMA mounting)

– Vacuum cleaner

– Hard hat

– Dust mask

– Safety goggles

– Safety gloves

– 4 ft step ladder

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 213


Appendix

Id:0900d805805b0be3

Confidential

Additional tools may be necessary for the installation of the power supply equipment,

antennas, transmission equipment, cable-ways and other infrastructure equipment.

Refer for additional information to the Tool and Testequipment Database in the Intranet:

https://tte-support.inside.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/tte/

5.2 Ancillary material

The following ancillary materials are needed:

– adhesive tape

– cable ties in different lengths

– wire end sleeves for 16 mm² copper wires

– cable lugs M8

– paint retouch kit (order no. A500-C101-B261)

– heat-shrink set including: heat-shrink sleeve for 1/2” coaxial cables (with adhesive

coating), cleaning tissue, heat protection tape, emery paper

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


214 DN0932994


Id:0900d805805b0be3

Confidential

Appendix

5.3 Technical data

5.3.1 Technical data BS-240 / BS-240 II / BS-240 IIB

Parameter BS-240 / BS-240 II BS-240 IIB

overall dimensions (HxWxD) 1600 x 600 x 450 mm 1530 x 600 x 450 mm

weights:

rack (unequipped):

frame with 4 ACOM

frame with 4 CU + 1 ACOM

frame with 4 CU

frame with 6 AC/DC

frame with battery set*

DC Panel*dependend on battery type

60 kg / 60 kg

40 kg / 40 kg

40 kg / 40 kg

30 kg / 30 kg

27 kg / 35 kg

130-180 kg / 130-180 kg

10 kg

40 kg

30 kg

30 kg

25 kg

35 kg

130-180 kg

10 kg

mains input voltage (nominal):

input voltage range:

-48 Vdc

-40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc



frequency (nominal):

frequency range:

3 x 230 Vac

207 Vac to 253 Vac

50 Hz

45 Hz to 65 Hz

AC/DC converter

nominal output power

1600 W 2000 W

power consumption:TMA

AMCO

MUCO

CU (GSM)

ECU (Edge)

FCU

COBA

COSA

DC panel

frame

ACOMbattery set

9 W

25,5 W

12,5 W

150 W per module

210 W per module

310 W per module

17 W

17 W

10 W

60 W

43 W20 W

location condition: indoor

Abis link media: wire, fibre optic, microwave

CU per single rack: max. 8

multiple cell per BTSE max. 12

no. of CU per Cell 1 - 12

Table 82 Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


DN0932994 215


Appendix

Id:0900d805805b0be3

Confidential

5.3.2 Technical data BS-240XL / BS-240XL II / BS-240 XL IIB

external interfaces:

TX/RX antenna

Abis interface

mains input AC

mains input DC

ground connection

external alarms

LMT

7/16, female

terminal block (120 Ohm) or 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm)

terminal block (max. AWG 8)

terminal block (max. AWG 6), BS-240

terminal block (max. AWG 2), BS-240 II,

BS-240XL / XL II

bolt M8

spring terminal blocks

SubD 15, female, RJ45 connector

Parameter BS-240 / BS-240 II BS-240 IIB

Table 82 Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB (Cont.)

Parameter BS-240XL / 240 XL II BS-240 XL IIB

overall dimensions (HxWxD) 2025 x 600 x 450 mm 1831 x 600 x 450 mm

weights:

rack (unequipped):

frame with 4 ACOM

frame with 4 CU + 1 ACOM

frame with 4 CU

frame with 6 AC/DCframe with battery set*

DC Panel

*dependend on battery type

80 kg / 80 kg

40 kg /40 kg

40 kg / 40 kg

30 kg / 30 kg

27 kg / 35 kg130-180 kg / 130-180 kg

15 kg

50 kg

30 kg

30 kg

25 kg

35 kg130-180 kg

15 kg



-48 Vdc

-40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc



frequency (nominal):

frequency range:

3 x 230 Vac

207 Vac to 253 Vac

50 Hz

45 Hz to 65 Hz

AC/DC converter

nominal output power

1600 W 2000 W

Table 83 Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II


216 DN0932994


Id:0900d805805b0be3

Confidential

Appendix

power consumption:

TMA

AMCOMUCO

CU (GSM)

ECU (Edge)

FCU

COBA

COSA

DC panel

frame

ACOM

battery set

9 W

25,5 W12,5 W

150 W per module

210 W per module

310 W per module

17 W

17 W

10 W

60 W

43 W

20 W

location condition: indoor

Abis link media: wire , fibre optic, microwave

CU per single rack: max. 12

external interfaces:

TX/RX antenna

Abis interface

mains input AC

mains input DC

ground connection

external alarms

LMT

7/16, female

terminal block (120 Ohm) or

1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm)terminal block (max. AWG 8)

terminal block (max. AWG 2

bolt M8

spring terminal blocks

SubD 15, female, RJ45 connector

Parameter BS-240XL / 240 XL II BS-240 XL IIB

Table 83 Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB (Cont.)

8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II



Appendix

5.4 Checklist for Base Station Installation

Check Item Yes No

Rack fixed to floor and wall (wall excepted in erthquake zones)

Grounding

BTS connected to ground as described in section “External

Cabling Activities”

Cable screens of all cables connected to ground at the cable

window of the building

Power Supply

Cross section of power supply cable sufficient

Documents

BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II